"3.3 PT Programming" of the Feature Guide. Users in

"3.3 PT Programming" of the Feature Guide. Users in
Advanced Hybrid System
Feature Guide
Model No.
KX-TEA308
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
Introduction
About this Feature Guide
The Feature Guide is designed to serve as an overall reference describing the features of the Panasonic
Advanced Hybrid System.
It explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and facilities.
The Feature Guide is divided into the following sections:
Section 1, Call Handling Features
Describes the features of the PBX related to making and receiving calls, and operating telephones.
Section 2, System Configuration and Administration Features
Describes the features that allow the PBX to be configured and administered to suit the needs of its users.
Section 3, Programming Instructions
Serves as an overall system programming reference for the PBX.
Section 4, Appendix
Provides tables that describe the resource capacity of the PBX, as well as its different tones and ring tones.
Index
References Found in the Feature Guide
Installation Manual References
The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX.
Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout the Feature Guide for your reference.
Feature Guide References
Related sections of the Feature Guide are listed for your reference.
User Manual References
The User Manual describes how users can access commonly used PBX features and functions with their
proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), and Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles.
Sections from the User Manual are listed throughout the Feature Guide for your reference.
PT Programming References
Commonly used settings can be programmed using a display PT ( 2.3.2 PT Programming). These PT
programming items are noted throughout the Feature Guide for your reference by title and programme
number. The following is an example of a PT Programming reference:
"Idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type ( Hunting
Type [101])."
Links to Other Pages and Manuals
If you are viewing this Feature Guide with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of the Feature
Guide and other PBX manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
Linked items include:
2
Feature Guide
•
•
•
•
Installation Manual References
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
PT Programming References
Notes
•
•
Certain PTs, features, and optional service cards are not available in some areas. Consult your certified
Panasonic dealer for more information.
Every system programming setting can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TEA308
Maintenance Console software ( 2.3.1 PC Programming). For programming details, refer to the online help that is installed along with KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console ( 3.2.1 Installing and Starting
KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console).
The KX-TEA308E, the KX-TEA308NE, the KX-TEA308GR, the KX-TEA308CE,
and the KX-TEA308PD are designed to interwork with the Analogue Public
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries.
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd./Panasonic Communications Company (U.K.) Ltd. declares that
this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio
& Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC.
Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available
for download by visiting:
http://www.doc.panasonic.de
Contact:
Panasonic Services Europe
a Division of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
Trademarks
•
•
•
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Celeron and Intel are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the
United States and other countries.
All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
Feature Guide
3
List of Abbreviations
A
AA
Automated Attendant
APT
Analogue Proprietary Telephone
ARS
Automatic Route Selection
BGM
Background Music
BSS
Busy Station Signalling
BV
Built-in Voice Message
COS
Class of Service
CPC
Calling Party Control
DIL
Direct In Line
DISA
Direct Inward System Access
DND
Do Not Disturb
DRD
Distinctive Ring Detection
DSS
Direct Station Selection
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
E
EFA
External Feature Access
F
FWD
Call Forwarding
G
G-CO
Group-CO
I
IRNA
Intercept Routing—No Answer
L
LCS
Live Call Screening
LED
Light Emitting Diode
O-CO
Other-CO
OGM
Outgoing Message
PF
Programmable Feature
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
PT
Proprietary Telephone
S-CO
Single-CO
SLT
Single Line Telephone
SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording
SMS
Short Message Service
TAM
Telephone Answering Machine
TRS
Toll Restriction
U
UCD
Uniform Call Distribution
V
VM
Voice Mail
VPS
Voice Processing System
B
C
D
O
P
S
T
4
Feature Guide
Feature Highlights
Built-in Voice Message (BV) (Optional voice message card required)
Built-in Voice Message (BV) allows a caller to leave a voice message in a user's personal message area or
the PBX's common message area ( 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)).
Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support (Optional Caller ID card required)
The PBX can relay incoming calls from a Short Message Service (SMS) centre to specific single line
telephones (SLTs) that support SMS. Fixed Line SMS is a service that allows text messages to be sent and
received via Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) access. We recommend using SMS-enabled
Panasonic SLTs ( 1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support).
Caller ID Display on SLT (Optional Caller ID card required)
The PBX can receive Caller ID information (telephone numbers and callers' names) from calls received on
outside (CO) lines. This information can be shown on the displays of SLTs that support Caller ID as well as
proprietary telephones (PTs) when receiving calls ( 1.16.1 Caller ID).
3-level Automated Attendant (AA)
3-level Automated Attendant (AA) service allows a caller to dial a single-digit number (Direct Inward System
Access [DISA] AA number) following the guidance of 3-level DISA outgoing messages (OGMs), and be
connected to the desired party automatically ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)).
PC Programming
System programming settings can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TEA308 Maintenance
Console software as well as by using a PT ( 2.3.1 PC Programming).
The PBX software can be upgraded via the Serial Interface (RS-232C port) or USB port, using the KXTEA308 Maintenance Console software ( 2.3.7 Firmware Upgrade).
Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type
The dialling mode of connected outside (CO) lines is automatically configured the first time the PBX is
accessed with a PC using the KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console software, or after the PBX data has been
cleared ( 2.3.5 Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type).
Advanced Hybrid System
This PBX supports the connection of PTs*1, Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles, and single line
devices such as SLTs, fax machines, wireless telephones, and data terminals.
*1
In this manual, "proprietary telephone" ("PT") means an analogue proprietary telephone (APT).
Feature Guide
5
Table of Contents
1
6
Call Handling Features......................................................................... 13
1.1
1.1.1
Incoming Call Features..................................................................................................14
Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Features ......................................................................14
1.1.1.1
1.1.1.2
Direct In Line (DIL) .......................................................................................................................................... 14
Intercept Routing ............................................................................................................................................. 15
1.1.2
1.1.3
Internal Call Features.......................................................................................................16
Incoming Call Indication Features .................................................................................... 17
1.1.3.1
1.1.3.2
1.1.3.3
1.1.3.4
1.1.3.5
Incoming Call Indication Features—OVERVIEW............................................................................................. 17
Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection............................................................................................................... 18
Ring Tone Pattern Selection ............................................................................................................................ 19
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand ......................................................................................... 20
Call Waiting ..................................................................................................................................................... 22
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.3
1.3.1
Receiving Group Features ............................................................................................ 23
Idle Extension Hunting .....................................................................................................23
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) .......................................................................................25
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring ......................................................................28
Log-in/Log-out ..................................................................................................................29
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features .............................................30
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND).................................................................30
1.3.1.1
1.3.1.2
1.3.1.3
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW.......................................................................... 30
Call Forwarding (FWD) .................................................................................................................................... 31
Do Not Disturb (DND)...................................................................................................................................... 34
1.4
1.4.1
Answering Features.......................................................................................................35
Answering Features .........................................................................................................35
1.4.1.1
1.4.1.2
1.4.1.3
1.4.1.4
Answering Features—OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................. 35
Line Preference—Incoming ............................................................................................................................. 36
Call Pickup....................................................................................................................................................... 37
Hands-free Answerback .................................................................................................................................. 38
1.5
1.5.1
Making Call Features .....................................................................................................39
Intercom Call Features .....................................................................................................39
1.5.1.1
Intercom Call ................................................................................................................................................... 39
1.5.2
Outside (CO) Line Call Features ......................................................................................41
1.5.2.1
1.5.2.2
1.5.2.3
1.5.2.4
1.5.2.5
1.5.2.6
1.5.2.7
Outside (CO) Line Call Features—OVERVIEW............................................................................................... 41
Emergency Call ............................................................................................................................................... 42
Account Code Entry ........................................................................................................................................ 43
Dial Type Selection .......................................................................................................................................... 44
Reverse Circuit ................................................................................................................................................ 45
Pause Insertion................................................................................................................................................ 46
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) .................................. 47
1.5.3
Seizing a Line Features ...................................................................................................49
1.5.3.1
1.5.3.2
1.5.3.3
Seizing a Line Features—OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................ 49
Line Preference—Outgoing ............................................................................................................................. 50
Outside (CO) Line Access ............................................................................................................................... 51
1.6
1.6.1
Memory Dialling Features ............................................................................................. 53
Memory Dialling Features ................................................................................................53
1.6.1.1
1.6.1.2
1.6.1.3
1.6.1.4
1.6.1.5
1.6.1.6
1.6.1.7
Memory Dialling Features—OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 53
One-touch Dialling ........................................................................................................................................... 55
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling.......................................................................................................................... 56
Redial ............................................................................................................................................................. 57
Speed Dialling—Personal/System................................................................................................................... 58
Quick Dialling................................................................................................................................................... 59
Hot Line ........................................................................................................................................................... 60
Feature Guide
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.9
1.9.1
1.10
1.10.1
1.10.2
1.10.3
1.10.4
1.10.5
1.10.6
1.10.7
1.10.8
1.10.9
1.10.10
1.11
1.11.1
1.12
1.12.1
1.12.2
1.12.3
1.12.4
1.12.5
1.13
1.13.1
Busy Line/Busy Party Features.................................................................................... 61
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)............................................................................... 61
Executive Busy Override ................................................................................................. 62
Call Waiting Tone............................................................................................................. 63
Toll Restriction (TRS) Features .................................................................................... 64
Toll Restriction (TRS)....................................................................................................... 64
Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code ........................................................... 68
Extension Lock ................................................................................................................ 70
Walking COS ................................................................................................................... 71
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features ................................................................ 72
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ................................................................................... 72
Conversation Features.................................................................................................. 78
Hands-free Operation ...................................................................................................... 78
Room Monitor .................................................................................................................. 79
Microphone Mute............................................................................................................. 80
Headset Operation .......................................................................................................... 81
Data Line Security ........................................................................................................... 82
Flash/Recall..................................................................................................................... 83
External Feature Access (EFA) ....................................................................................... 84
Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation .................................................................................... 85
Parallelled Telephone ...................................................................................................... 86
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection ................................................................. 87
Transferring Features.................................................................................................... 88
Call Transfer..................................................................................................................... 88
Holding Features ........................................................................................................... 90
Call Hold .......................................................................................................................... 90
Call Park .......................................................................................................................... 92
Call Splitting..................................................................................................................... 93
Music on Hold.................................................................................................................. 94
Consultation Hold ............................................................................................................ 95
Conference Features..................................................................................................... 96
Conference Features ....................................................................................................... 96
1.13.1.1
1.13.1.2
Conference Features—OVERVIEW.................................................................................................................96
Conference ......................................................................................................................................................97
1.14
1.14.1
1.15
1.15.1
1.15.2
1.15.3
1.15.4
1.15.5
1.15.6
1.15.7
1.16
1.16.1
1.16.2
1.17
1.17.1
1.17.2
1.17.3
Paging Features............................................................................................................. 99
Paging ............................................................................................................................. 99
Optional Device Features ........................................................................................... 100
Doorphone Call ............................................................................................................. 100
Door Open ..................................................................................................................... 101
Doorbell/Door Chime ..................................................................................................... 102
Background Music (BGM) ............................................................................................. 104
Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD ..................................................................... 105
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ............................................................................ 106
Built-in Voice Message (BV) .......................................................................................... 114
Caller ID Features ........................................................................................................ 120
Caller ID......................................................................................................................... 120
Incoming Call Log.......................................................................................................... 124
Message Features ....................................................................................................... 127
Message Waiting ........................................................................................................... 127
Absent Message............................................................................................................ 129
Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support ................................................................................. 130
Feature Guide
7
1.18
1.18.1
1.18.2
1.18.3
1.18.4
1.19
1.19.1
1.19.2
1.20
1.20.1
1.20.2
1.21
1.21.1
1.21.2
1.22
1.22.1
1.22.2
2
System Configuration and Administration Features ...................... 161
2.1
2.1.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
3
Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features ......................................................................... 134
Fixed Buttons ................................................................................................................. 134
Flexible Buttons..............................................................................................................136
LED Indication................................................................................................................138
Display Information.........................................................................................................140
Voice Mail Features ...................................................................................................... 142
Voice Mail APT Integration ............................................................................................. 142
Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration............................................................................147
Administrative Information Output Features.............................................................150
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)...................................................................150
Call Log Printout for Each Extension .............................................................................155
Extension Controlling Features .................................................................................. 156
Extension Feature Clear ................................................................................................156
Timed Reminder.............................................................................................................157
Audible Tone Features................................................................................................. 158
Dial Tone ........................................................................................................................158
Confirmation Tone ..........................................................................................................159
System Configuration—Hardware ..............................................................................162
Extension Jack Configuration......................................................................................... 162
System Configuration—Software ...............................................................................163
Class of Service (COS) .................................................................................................. 163
Group .............................................................................................................................164
Time Service ..................................................................................................................166
Operator/Manager Features........................................................................................... 169
System Data Control....................................................................................................172
PC Programming............................................................................................................172
PT Programming ............................................................................................................175
Automatic Time Adjustment ........................................................................................... 177
Feature Numbering ........................................................................................................ 178
Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type .....................................................184
Country Setting ..............................................................................................................185
Firmware Upgrade .........................................................................................................186
Fault Recovery/Diagnostics ........................................................................................187
Power Failure Transfer....................................................................................................187
Power Failure Restart.....................................................................................................188
Programming Instructions................................................................. 189
3.1
3.1.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
Introduction ..................................................................................................................190
Introduction ....................................................................................................................190
PC Programming .......................................................................................................... 191
Installing and Starting KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console.............................................191
PT Programming .......................................................................................................... 192
Programming Instructions ..............................................................................................192
Programming Procedures ..............................................................................................197
Date & Time [000].......................................................................................................................................... 197
System Speed Dialling Number [001]............................................................................................................ 197
System Password [002] ................................................................................................................................. 198
DSS Console Jack Assignment [003] ............................................................................................................ 199
Console Paired Telephone [004].................................................................................................................... 199
One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005] .............................................................................................. 199
8
Feature Guide
Time Service Switching Mode [006] ..............................................................................................................200
Time Service Start Time [007] .......................................................................................................................200
Operator Assignment [008] ............................................................................................................................200
Extension Number [009] ................................................................................................................................201
LCD Time Display [010] .................................................................................................................................201
System Speed Dialling Name [011] ...............................................................................................................202
Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]..........................................................................................................202
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013] ...............................................................................................................203
Hunting Group Set [100] ................................................................................................................................203
Hunting Type [101] .........................................................................................................................................203
DTMF Integration Port [102] ..........................................................................................................................204
DTMF Integration [103] ..................................................................................................................................204
SLT Hold Mode [104] .....................................................................................................................................204
Conference Tone [105]...................................................................................................................................204
External Pager Access Tone [106].................................................................................................................205
DTMF Receiver Check [107]..........................................................................................................................205
Flash/Recall Mode for a Locked Extension [108]...........................................................................................205
CO Indicator [109]..........................................................................................................................................205
Flash/Recall Key Mode [110] .........................................................................................................................205
Music on Hold [111] .......................................................................................................................................206
DSS Lamp Mode [112] ..................................................................................................................................206
Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113]............................................................................................................206
Automatic Redial Interval [114] ......................................................................................................................206
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] ................................................................................................................207
Conference Pattern [116]...............................................................................................................................207
Call Pickup Tone [117] ...................................................................................................................................207
Pulse Restriction [118]...................................................................................................................................207
Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119] ............................................................................................208
Bell Frequency [120] ......................................................................................................................................208
Automatic Line Access [121]..........................................................................................................................208
Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122]................................................................................................208
Break Ratio [123] ...........................................................................................................................................208
TRS Check for * and # [125] ..........................................................................................................................209
DSS Off-hook Mode [126]..............................................................................................................................209
Pickup Group [127] ........................................................................................................................................209
Ringback Tone Pattern [128]..........................................................................................................................209
VM 1 APT Port [130] ......................................................................................................................................210
SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142] .........................................................................................................................210
SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143] ..........................................................................................................................210
SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145].......................................................................................................211
SMS Routing Table—CO [146] ......................................................................................................................211
SMS Routing Table—Extension [147]............................................................................................................211
SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150]................................................................................................................211
SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151] ......................................................................................................212
Automatic Time Adjustment [152] ..................................................................................................................212
Incoming Reverse [153] .................................................................................................................................212
Hold Recall Time [200] ..................................................................................................................................212
Transfer Recall Time [201] .............................................................................................................................212
Call Forwarding Start Time [202] ...................................................................................................................212
Hot Line Waiting Time [203]...........................................................................................................................213
Call Duration Counter Start [204]...................................................................................................................213
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205] ................................................................................................................213
Dialling Start Time [206] ................................................................................................................................213
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207] ..........................................................................................................214
Inter-digit Time [208]......................................................................................................................................214
DTMF Time [210]...........................................................................................................................................214
No Dial Disconnection [211] ..........................................................................................................................214
Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]......................................................................................................214
Bell-off Detection [213] ..................................................................................................................................215
BV Recording Time [214]...............................................................................................................................215
Feature Guide
9
Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215] ...................................................................................... 215
Carrier Exception Code [300] ........................................................................................................................ 215
TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301]..................................................................................................... 216
TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]........................................................................................................ 216
TRS—Exception Code [306] ......................................................................................................................... 216
Emergency Number [309].............................................................................................................................. 216
Account Code [310] ....................................................................................................................................... 217
Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311] .......................................................................................................... 217
TRS—Extension Lock Class [312] ................................................................................................................ 217
ARS Selection [350] ...................................................................................................................................... 218
Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] ............................................................................................................. 218
Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358] ............................................................................................................ 218
1st Carrier Selection Code [359] ................................................................................................................... 218
ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360] ..................................................................................................... 219
ARS Modification—Added Number [361] ...................................................................................................... 219
ARS Dial Tone [362] ...................................................................................................................................... 219
ARS Inter-digit Time [363] ............................................................................................................................. 219
ARS CO Line Group [364] ............................................................................................................................. 220
Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384] ....................................................................................................... 220
Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388] ............................................................................................................. 220
Itemised Billing Code [389]............................................................................................................................ 221
Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390]..................................................................................... 221
CO Line Connection [400] ............................................................................................................................. 221
Dial Mode [401] ............................................................................................................................................. 222
Pulse Speed [402] ......................................................................................................................................... 222
Host PBX Access Code [403]........................................................................................................................ 222
CO Line Group Number [404]........................................................................................................................ 223
Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]................................................................................. 223
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]............................................................................................... 224
Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413] .............................................................................................. 224
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416] ................................................................................................. 225
Pause Time [417] .......................................................................................................................................... 226
Flash/Recall Time [418]................................................................................................................................. 226
Automatic Designated Line Access [419] ...................................................................................................... 227
CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420]......................................................................................................... 227
CPC Signal Detection—Outgoing [421]......................................................................................................... 227
Disconnect Time [422]................................................................................................................................... 228
CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]................................................................................................................... 228
Polarity Reverse Detection [424] ................................................................................................................... 229
Collect Call Block [425] (Brazil only).............................................................................................................. 229
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only) ........................................................................ 229
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only).................... 230
DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only).................... 230
DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] (New Zealand only).................................................................... 231
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440] ............................................................................................ 231
DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500] ............................................................................................................. 231
DISA Built-in AA [501] ................................................................................................................................... 232
FAX Connection [503].................................................................................................................................... 232
DISA Delayed Answer Time [504] ................................................................................................................. 232
DISA Wait Time after OGM [505] .................................................................................................................. 232
DISA Busy Mode [506] .................................................................................................................................. 233
DISA Intercept Mode [507] ............................................................................................................................ 233
DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508].......................................................................................................... 233
DISA Ring Time after Intercept [509]............................................................................................................. 233
DISA No Dial Mode [510] .............................................................................................................................. 234
DISA Security Mode [511] ............................................................................................................................. 234
DISA Security Code [512] ............................................................................................................................. 234
Cyclic Tone Detection [513] ........................................................................................................................... 235
FAX Tone Detection [514].............................................................................................................................. 235
Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515] ........................................................................................................... 235
10
Feature Guide
DISA Incoming Assignment [516] ..................................................................................................................236
DISA AA Wait Time [517]...............................................................................................................................236
DISA Tone after Security Code [518].............................................................................................................236
OGM Mute Time [519] ...................................................................................................................................236
UCD Group [520] ...........................................................................................................................................236
UCD Busy Waiting Time [521] .......................................................................................................................237
UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522] .......................................................................................................237
UCD Busy Mode [523] ...................................................................................................................................237
UCD Intercept Mode [524] .............................................................................................................................237
UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]...........................................................................................................237
UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526] .............................................................................................................238
UCD Waiting Message [527]..........................................................................................................................238
DISA Security Code Digits [530]....................................................................................................................238
DISA Ringback Tone [531].............................................................................................................................238
3-level AA Assignment [540-549]...................................................................................................................239
Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]...............................................................................................................239
Extension Group [600] ...................................................................................................................................239
TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603] ........................................................................................................240
Extension Name [604] ...................................................................................................................................240
Account Code Mode [605] .............................................................................................................................240
Call Transfer to CO Line [606]........................................................................................................................241
Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]...................................................................................................................241
Executive Busy Override [608].......................................................................................................................241
DND Override [609] .......................................................................................................................................242
Parallelled Telephone [610]............................................................................................................................242
TAM Extension [611] ......................................................................................................................................242
Room Monitor [612] .......................................................................................................................................243
CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613]...........................................................................................................243
Internal Pulse Detection [614]........................................................................................................................243
LCD Language [615]......................................................................................................................................244
Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] ....................................................................................................................244
Message Waiting for Another Extension [618] ...............................................................................................245
SLT Message Waiting [619] ...........................................................................................................................245
LCS Recording Mode Set [620] .....................................................................................................................245
BV Resource [621].........................................................................................................................................246
BV for Extension [622] ...................................................................................................................................246
BV Access Code through CO Line [625] .......................................................................................................246
BGM Control for APT [626] ............................................................................................................................247
SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]..........................................................................................................247
SLT Caller ID [628].........................................................................................................................................247
SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629] ..........................................................................................................................248
Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702] .........................................................................................248
Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]....................................................................................................249
Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706] ..............................................................................................................249
Doorphone Access Tone [707].......................................................................................................................250
Doorphone Ring Time [708]...........................................................................................................................250
Door Open Duration [709]..............................................................................................................................250
Doorphone Ring/Chime [710] ........................................................................................................................251
Doorphone Chime Assignment [711].............................................................................................................251
Doorphone Chime Pattern [712] ....................................................................................................................251
SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800] ..................................................................................................................252
SMDR Parameter [801]..................................................................................................................................252
Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802] ......................................................................................252
Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803].............................................................................................253
System Data Dump [804]...............................................................................................................................253
SMDR Account Code [805]............................................................................................................................254
SMDR Language [806] ..................................................................................................................................254
BV Total Recording Time [807] ......................................................................................................................254
BV Card Initialisation [808] ............................................................................................................................254
Caller ID [900]................................................................................................................................................255
Feature Guide
11
Caller ID Area Code [901] ............................................................................................................................. 255
Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902].................................................................................................... 255
Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903]...................................................................................... 256
Caller ID Log Priority [904] ............................................................................................................................ 256
Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905].............................................................................................................. 256
Caller ID SMDR Format [906]........................................................................................................................ 257
Caller ID SMDR Printout [907] ...................................................................................................................... 257
Common Area Call Log Check [909] ............................................................................................................. 257
Caller ID Type [910] ....................................................................................................................................... 257
Call Log Next Page [927] .............................................................................................................................. 258
SMDR Mode for Printing [929] ...................................................................................................................... 258
Call Forwarding Selection [963]..................................................................................................................... 258
TRS Check after Answering [966] ................................................................................................................. 258
TRS Check Time after Answering [967] ........................................................................................................ 259
KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968] ............................................................................................ 259
Country [995]................................................................................................................................................. 259
Firmware Version [998].................................................................................................................................. 259
System Data Clear [999] ............................................................................................................................... 260
4
Appendix ............................................................................................. 261
4.1
4.1.1
4.2
4.2.1
Capacity of System Resources...................................................................................262
Capacity of System Resources ......................................................................................262
Tones/Ring Tones.........................................................................................................264
Tones/Ring Tones...........................................................................................................264
Index .......................................................................................................... 271
12
Feature Guide
Section
1
Call Handling Features
Feature Guide
13
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1
Incoming Call Features
1.1.1
Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Features
1.1.1.1
Direct In Line (DIL)
Description
Directs incoming outside (CO) line calls to a preprogrammed destination based on the outside (CO) line
carrying the call. Each outside (CO) line can have a different destination for each time service mode.
[Programming Example]
The table can be programmed for each outside (CO) line.
Distribution method and destination*
Outside (CO) Line No.
Day
*
Lunch
Night
1
DIL
101
DIL
102
DIL
102
2
DIL
103
DIL
103
DIL
103
3
Normal
–
Normal
–
Normal
–
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
In this example:
If an outside (CO) line call is received on outside (CO) line 1:
a) In day mode: Direct In Line (DIL) distribution is assigned. The call is routed to its DIL destination,
extension 101.
b) In lunch/night mode: DIL distribution is assigned. The call is routed to its DIL destination, extension
102.
Conditions
•
•
•
To use this feature, "DIL" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line
port. When "Normal" is selected, an incoming outside (CO) line call is received at the extensions
assigned in Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410].
This outside (CO) line can be used by multiple extension users to make calls, but can only be used by
a single extension to receive calls.
If a DIL destination is an extension within an extension group that has enabled the Idle Extension
Hunting feature and it is busy, the Idle Extension Hunting feature becomes active ( 1.2.1 Idle
Extension Hunting).
Feature Guide References
2.2.3 Time Service
14
Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.1.2
Intercept Routing
Description
Redirects incoming outside (CO) line calls via the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) or Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD) feature to a preprogrammed destination when the original destination does not, or
cannot, answer the call. There are 2 types of Intercept Routing, described below.
Type
Description
No Dial
While or after hearing a DISA outgoing message (OGM) or after hearing a dial tone
(short beep), if the caller does not dial anything or enters an unrecognised input, the
call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority:
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch
[408-410]
Intercept
Routing—No
Answer (IRNA)
If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period ( DISA
Ring Time before Intercept [508], UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]), the call is
redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority:
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch
[408-410]
Feature Guide References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Feature Guide
15
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.2
Internal Call Features
Description
There are 2 types of internal calls, described below.
Feature
16
Description
Details in
Intercom Call
A call from one extension to another.
Doorphone Call
A call made from a doorphone to its preprogrammed destination • 1.15.1
for the current time service mode, assigned to the doorphone's Doorphone Call
port ( 2.2.3 Time Service).
Feature Guide
• 1.5.1.1 Intercom
Call
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.3
Incoming Call Indication Features
1.1.3.1
Incoming Call Indication Features—OVERVIEW
Description
Extension telephones can indicate an incoming call in various ways, described below.
Indication Type
Feature
Description
Details in
Ring/No Ring
Outside (CO) Line
Ringing Selection
Each extension can be programmed to • 1.1.3.2 Outside
ring or not ring when receiving an outside (CO) Line Ringing
(CO) line call.
Selection
Ring Tone
Ring Tone Pattern
Selection
A telephone rings when receiving a call. • 1.1.3.3 Ring
A different ring tone pattern can be
Tone Pattern
assigned to each incoming call type.
Selection
Voice-calling
Alternate
Receiving—Ring/
Voice
Proprietary telephone (PT) users can
choose how their telephones receive
intercom calls, by selecting to hear ring
tones or the caller's voice.
LED (Light Emitting LED Indication
Diode)
• 1.5.1.1 Intercom
Call
The LED indicators on a PT can indicate • 1.18.3 LED
the status of different lines using light
Indication
patterns and colours.
Display (Caller
Information)
Display Information A user's PT can show a variety of
• 1.18.4 Display
information on the display, such as the
Information
outside (CO) line number, the caller's
name and number, the extension number
and name of the calling extension after
the call is forwarded, etc.
Tone During a
Conversation
Call Waiting
When an extension user is in the middle • 1.1.3.5 Call
of a call, the user can be alerted to a new Waiting
call by a call waiting tone.
Feature Guide
17
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.3.2
Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection
Description
An extension user can select whether the telephone will ring or not when receiving call(s) from assigned or
all outside (CO) lines through personal programming.
Conditions
•
•
System programming determines which extension(s) will ring for incoming outside (CO) line calls in
each time service mode ( Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]).
If an outside (CO) line call reaches a user's extension, but the extension is set to not ring, the CO button
will flash. The outside (CO) line call can be answered by pressing the flashing CO button.
User Manual References
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
18
Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.3.3
Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Description
A different ring tone pattern can be assigned to each incoming call type, such as intercom calls (
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]), calls from each doorphone ( Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]),
and calls from each outside (CO) line ( CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]).
Available ring tone patterns are as follows:
[Ring Tone Patterns]
1s
Single
Double
Triple
S-Double
(Doorphone only)
Conditions
•
The ring tone pattern for incoming calls (intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls) to a single line
telephone (SLT) can be fixed to "Single" or "Double" for each extension through system programming
( SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629]). The length of the ring tone pattern depends on the preprogrammed
length of the bell-on signal ( SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]), combined with the ratio between the bell
signals of the SLT ( SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142]). Depending on the type of SLT being used, the
SLT may not ring properly, if the ring tone pattern of the SLT is set differently from that used by the
telephone company.
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.2 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
Feature Guide
19
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.3.4
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
Description
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) is only available in New Zealand.
The PBX can detect the following 4 ring tone patterns sent from the telephone company for each outside
(CO) line. When the PBX detects one of the ring tone patterns, the call will be transferred to the
preprogrammed destination(s) automatically according to system programming. In addition, the extension
ring tone pattern for the detected call can be assigned through system programming as shown below.
[Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company]
1s
Pattern 1
(Normal)
Pattern 2
(Voice)
Pattern 3
(Modem/Voice)
Pattern 4
(Fax)
Pattern
Destination assigned in
Ring Tone Pattern assigned in
1
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408410], or sent to the Direct Inward System
Access (DISA) line or Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD) group
CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]
2
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment— DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434]
Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand
(New Zealand only)
only)
3
DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment— DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434]
Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand
(New Zealand only)
only)
4
FAX Connection [503]
CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]
Conditions
•
To use this feature, "UCD", "DISA", or "Normal" must be selected as the distribution method for the
desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]) and DRD must be
enabled ( Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only)).
Feature Guide References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
20
Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
Feature Guide
21
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.3.5
Call Waiting
Description
A busy extension user can be alerted to a new call by Call Waiting. The busy extension user can then answer
the second call either by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold.
If Call Waiting is enabled, a call waiting tone will be sent to the user under the following conditions:
a) When an outside (CO) line call or a doorphone call is received, or
b) When another extension executes the Busy Station Signalling (BSS) feature.
If disabled, a reorder tone will be sent to the extension that executed the BSS feature.
Call Waiting from the Telephone Company
Besides the Call Waiting feature provided by the PBX, you can also subscribe to your telephone company's
Call Waiting service and receive call waiting tones through the telephone company's lines. This feature is
available when an extension is in a conversation with an outside party, and a call is received from another
outside party on the same outside (CO) line. The external call waiting tone will alert an extension user of
the incoming outside (CO) line call that is waiting. The user can answer the second call by disconnecting
the current call or placing it on hold. If a call waiting tone is heard but the corresponding CO button does not
flash, this tone is an external call waiting tone from the telephone company. For details, consult your
telephone company.
Conditions
•
•
•
Data Line Security
When an extension user activates Data Line Security, Call Waiting is turned off ( 1.10.5 Data Line
Security).
Call Waiting Tone
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the preferred call waiting tone through personal
programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection).
Caller ID Information
When an extension receives a call waiting tone, the caller's information will flash on the display for 5
seconds at 15-second intervals.
Feature Guide References
1.7.3 Call Waiting Tone
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
User Manual References
1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
1.7.3 Receiving Call Waiting
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
22
Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2
Receiving Group Features
1.2.1
Idle Extension Hunting
Description
If a called extension is busy, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the call to an idle member of the same
extension group, if that group has been assigned as an idle extension hunting group through system
programming ( Hunting Group Set [100]). Idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a
preprogrammed hunting type ( Hunting Type [101]).
This feature is also known as Station Hunting.
Type
Circular Hunting
Description
An idle extension is searched for in a circular fashion one time according
to the numerical order of the jacks.
Incoming call
Busy
Extn.
Extn.
Busy
Extn.
Busy
Extn.
Numerical order
Terminated Hunting
An idle extension is searched for in the numerical order of the jacks, until
reaching the extension that is connected to the highest-numbered jack in
the group.
Incoming call
Highestnumbered jack
Extn.
Busy
Extn.
Busy
Extn.
Busy
Extn.
Numerical order
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
Idle Extension Hunting applies to:
Intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls directed to a single extension.
An extension can belong to only one extension group ( Extension Group [600]). One hunting type
can be programmed for each extension group.
If all the searched extensions in an idle extension hunting group are busy, a busy tone will be heard at
the extension that made the intercom call (including Direct Inward System Access [DISA] calls).
A user can leave an idle extension hunting group temporarily by logging out of the group, and rejoin the
group by logging back in ( 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out).
FWD/DND Mode
When searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension that has set
FWD, DND, or Log-out will be skipped ( 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)).
However, if the extension that receives the call first has set FWD or DND, Idle Extension Hunting will
Feature Guide
23
1.2 Receiving Group Features
•
not function and the call will be forwarded to the preprogrammed destination (when FWD is set) or will
not be received at all (when DND is set).
Message Waiting
A message waiting indication will not be sent to an idle extension hunting destination.
The MESSAGE button light or Message/Ringer Lamp turns on at the original destination only ( 1.17.1
Message Waiting).
Feature Guide References
2.2.2 Group
24
Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2.2
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Description
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) distributes incoming calls to an idle member of the same extension group,
if that group has been assigned as a UCD group through system programming ( UCD Group [520]).
Available extensions are searched for in a circular fashion in numerical order. The UCD feature is particularly
helpful when a certain extension typically receives more calls than other extensions.
[Example of UCD Group]
The numbers found in circles below indicate calls and the order in which they arrived.
Calls arrive at the UCD group.
Queuing
When the destination extension is busy
or is logged out, the call waits in the
queue and a UCD OGM is sent to the
caller.
Call Distribution
Calls are distributed in
the numerical order of
the jacks.
3
Extn.
A
Extn. A
receives the
first call.
Extn.
B
UCD starts
searching
from extn. B
(Skips extn. A).
Extn.
C
Extn.
D
When the second call
arrives at extn. B, the
third call will be
directed to extn. C.
Feature Guide
25
1.2 Receiving Group Features
[Flowchart]
A UCD call from an outside
party is received.
The call reaches the UCD group.
Busy
Rings (when an extension is available)
A
B
UCD OGM
(UCD Ring Time before
Intercept expires)
The call is
established.
Rings (when an
extension is available)
Music on Hold is sent to the caller.
The call is not
answered.
Busy
Is Intercept Routing
employed?
Yes
Goes to B
Did the UCD Busy
Waiting Time expire?
No
Goes to A
Intercept-Normal
C
Yes
No
The call is
disconnected.
The call is directed
to another extension.
What is the
UCD Busy Mode ?
Disconnect
Disconnect-OGM
The call is
established.
A UCD OGM is sent
to the caller.
Goes to C
The call is
disconnected.
The call is
disconnected.
(UCD Ring Time after
Intercept expires)
Intercept-DISA
A DISA OGM is sent
to the caller.
The call is not
answered.
The call is
disconnected.
Goes to DISA
UCD Busy Mode
When all extensions in a UCD group are busy, a call will wait for a preprogrammed length of time ( UCD
Busy Waiting Time [521]). If this timer expires, the PBX will handle the call in one of the following ways
according to system programming ( UCD Busy Mode [523]):
a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected immediately.
b) Disconnect-OGM: The call is disconnected after a UCD outgoing message (OGM) plays (e.g.,
"We are still handling other calls. Please call back later.").
c) Intercept-Normal: The call is directed to preprogrammed destinations (
Flexible Ringing—Day/
Night/Lunch [408-410]).
d) Intercept-DISA: The call is directed to the DISA feature (
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)) and the caller hears a DISA OGM (e.g., "Thank you for calling Company A. Press 1 to
speak to Sales. Press 2 to speak to Support.").
26
Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
UCD Intercept Mode
When extensions in a UCD group are available but do not answer an outside (CO) line call within a
preprogrammed length of time ( UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]), the PBX will handle the call in
one of the following ways according to system programming ( UCD Intercept Mode [524]):
a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected. If a UCD OGM is not played, the call will not be
disconnected until the caller goes on-hook.
b) Intercept: The call is directed to preprogrammed destinations (
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/
Lunch [408-410]). The extensions that receive the redirected call ring for a preprogrammed time
period ( UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526]). When the timer expires, the call is disconnected.
If a UCD OGM is not played, the call will not be disconnected until the caller goes on-hook.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
To use this feature, "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line
port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
UCD OGM
It is possible to select the UCD OGM sent to the caller when a call arrives at a UCD group and all
extensions in the group are busy ( UCD Waiting Message [527]).
The Log-in or Log-out status can be set for each extension ( 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out). The last member
of a group cannot log out.
FWD/DND Mode
When searching for an available extension, any extension that has set FWD—All Calls, FWD—Busy/
No Answer, or DND will be skipped ( 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)).
UCD Busy Waiting Time
It is possible to assign the length of time ( UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]) the PBX holds an incoming
outside (CO) line call via the UCD feature when all extensions in the UCD group are busy, and to assign
the interval time between the repeated UCD OGMs ( UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522]).
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing
1.12.4 Music on Hold
2.2.2 Group
Feature Guide
27
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2.3
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
Description
A Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ring group is a specific extension group that receives DISA calls
directed to the group. All extensions in the DISA ring group assigned as an Automated Attendant (AA)
destination ( DISA Built-in AA [501]) ring simultaneously.
Delayed Ringing
Each extension can be programmed for Delayed Ringing ( Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411413]), which allows extensions to be alerted to calls by flashing buttons only. Received calls can be
answered by pressing the flashing button even if the extension is not ringing.
Extn.
A
Extn.
B
Extn.
C
Immediately ring simultaneously.
Extn.
D
Delayed Ringing:
Rings after a
specified time delay.
Conditions
•
•
•
To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line
port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]), and DISA AA service must be assigned as the
destination of incoming outside (CO) line calls via the DISA feature ( DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode
[500]).
The Log-in or Log-out status can be set for each extension ( 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out). The last member
of a group cannot log out.
The Delayed Ringing feature does not apply to DISA or Direct In Line (DIL) calls. If the destination is a
DISA ring group, this feature will function.
Feature Guide References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2.2.2 Group
28
Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2.4
Log-in/Log-out
Description
Members of an idle extension hunting group, Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ring group, or Uniform
Call Distribution (UCD) group can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) groups manually. Group members can log
in at the beginning of a work shift when they are ready to answer calls, and log out at the end of the work
shift.
Conditions
•
•
•
The last member of a group cannot log out.
While logged out from a group, a member extension will not receive calls to that group via the DISA,
UCD, or Idle Extension Hunting features.
Log-in/Log-out Button
A flexible CO button can be customised as a Log-in/Log-out button. It shows the current status as
follows:
Light Pattern
Status
Red on
Logged out
Off
Logged in
Feature Guide References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
User Manual References
1.5.4 Leaving a Group (Log-in/Log-out)
Feature Guide
29
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
Features
1.3.1
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
1.3.1.1
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW
Description
When an extension user cannot answer calls (is on a call, out of the office, etc.), it is possible to forward or
refuse calls directed to that extension using the following features:
1. Call Forwarding (FWD)
2. Do Not Disturb (DND)
1. FWD
Extension users can forward their incoming calls to preset destinations (
(FWD)).
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding
2. DND
An extension user can send a DND tone to let the caller know that he or she is not available (
Do Not Disturb (DND)).
1.3.1.3
Conditions
•
FWD/DND Button
If a proprietary telephone (PT) does not have an FWD/DND button, a flexible CO button can be
customised as an FWD/DND button.
[Button Status]
The FWD/DND button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
•
Red on
DND on
Slow red flashing
FWD on
Off
FWD/DND off
Setting a new FWD mode, such as All Calls or Busy/No Answer, or the DND feature, clears the status
of the previous FWD mode or DND feature.
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
30
Status
Feature Guide
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.2
Call Forwarding (FWD)
Description
Extension users can forward their calls to preset destinations. There are 4 Call Forwarding (FWD) modes,
described below.
Mode
Description
All Calls
All calls are forwarded to another extension.
Busy/No Answer
All calls are forwarded to another extension when the extension user's
line is busy, or when the user does not answer within a preprogrammed
time period ( Call Forwarding Start Time [202]).
To Outside (CO) Line
All calls are forwarded to an outside party, provided this feature is
enabled for each extension through system programming ( Call
Forwarding to CO Line [607]).
Follow Me
When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving his or
her desk, this feature can be set from the destination extension.
Forwarded to:
Extension
1. Another Extension
2. Outside Party
Incoming Intercom Calls/
Outside (CO) Line Calls
3. VPS
4. BV
[Available Destinations]
Destination
Availability
Extension (proprietary telephone [PT]/single line
telephone [SLT])
–
Automatic Line Access no. + Phone no.
Only available when FWD to Outside (CO) Line is
enabled for the extension through system
programming ( Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]).
Outside (CO) Line Group Access no. + Outside
(CO) Line Group no. + Phone no.
Only available when FWD to Outside (CO) Line is
enabled for the extension through system
programming ( Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]).
Voice Processing System (VPS)
–
Built-in Voice Message (BV) feature no.
Only available when the BV feature is enabled for the
extension through system programming ( BV for
Extension [622]).
Conditions
[General]
•
This feature does not apply to calls from Hold Recall, Camp-on Recall, and Timed Reminder.
Feature Guide
31
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
•
The types of calls that are forwarded by this feature are:
Call Type
•
•
•
•
Outside (CO) line calls
Normal except FWD to Outside (CO) Line, Direct In Line (DIL), Direct
Inward System Access (DISA)
Intercom calls
Extension, Transfer
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
When searching for an available extension within a UCD group, any extension that has set FWD will be
skipped. However, if the last extension that can receive a call has set FWD, the call will be forwarded
to that extension's call forwarding destination. The last member of a UCD group cannot log out.
When a call is forwarded, the corresponding message waiting indication is not forwarded. The
MESSAGE button light or Message/Ringer Lamp turns on only at the originally called extension (
1.17.1 Message Waiting).
It is programmable whether the calls received on outside (CO) lines programmed as "Normal" ( CO
Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]) are forwarded for each extension or not ( Call Forwarding
Selection [963]). If FWD is enabled for an extension whose FWD destination is a VPS or Telephone
Answering Machine (TAM) and the extension has been assigned to ring with other extensions, the VPS
or TAM may answer the call before other extensions can answer it. To prevent this, disable FWD.
A call can only be automatically forwarded one time. In the example below, extension A's calls are being
forwarded to extension B. If extension B tries to set FWD to extension C, the extension B user hears a
reorder tone and the setting is denied. If extension B has already set FWD to extension C, and
extension A tries to set FWD to extension B, the setting is also denied.
A
B
•
A
C
B
C
The destination of an extension's forwarded calls can call or transfer calls to the original extension.
FWD—All Calls
Incoming
call
Call or
transfer a call
Original
FWD destination
[Busy/No Answer]
•
No Answer Time
The length of time before calls are forwarded is programmable (
Call Forwarding Start Time [202]).
[To Outside (CO) Line]
•
FWD to Outside (CO) Line
System programming determines the extensions that can forward all intercom calls and certain outside
(CO) line calls to an outside party ( Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]). These outside (CO) line calls
must arrive on outside (CO) lines whose programming ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416])
is one of the following:
a) DIL
32
Feature Guide
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
b) DISA (only when the call is directly sent to an extension, not intercepted)
c) UCD (when only one member belongs to the group)
•
•
Outside (CO) Line Call Duration
If a call between 2 outside parties is established, the call duration will be restricted by a system timer
( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the
timer expires. When the timer expires, the call is disconnected ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call
Limitation).
If a CPC (Calling Party Control) signal or reverse signal is received from an outside (CO) line, the
corresponding call between 2 outside parties will be disconnected.
User Manual References
1.5.1 Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding [FWD])
1.5.5 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Voice Message [BV])
1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Feature Guide
33
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.3
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Description
Extension users can use this feature to prevent calls from ringing at their extension. The calling extension
will hear a Do Not Disturb (DND) tone.
Conditions
•
•
•
DND Override
An extension in DND mode can be called by extensions that are allowed to override DND through
system programming ( DND Override [609]).
This feature does not apply to calls from Hold Recall, Camp-on Recall, and Timed Reminder.
Calls from outside (CO) lines programmed as "Normal" or "DIL" ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch
[414-416]) can be received at a user's extension, but the telephone will not ring. The corresponding CO
button will flash when an outside (CO) line call is received, and the user can answer the call by pressing
this button.
User Manual References
1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
1.7.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
34
Feature Guide
1.4 Answering Features
1.4
Answering Features
1.4.1
Answering Features
1.4.1.1
Answering Features—OVERVIEW
Description
An extension user can answer incoming calls using the following methods:
Called
Extension
A user's own
extension
(proprietary
telephone [PT])
Feature
Description
Details in
Line Preference—
Incoming
A user can select the method to answer
incoming calls.
Direct One-touch
Answering
A user can answer an incoming call simply –
by pressing the flashing CO or INTERCOM
button.
Hands-free
Answerback
A user can answer calls automatically and
establish a hands-free conversation.
• 1.4.1.4 Handsfree Answerback
A user's own
Receiving Calls
extension (single
line telephone
[SLT])
A user can answer an incoming call simply
by going off-hook.
–
Another
extension
A user can pick up a call to a specific
• 1.4.1.3 Call
extension, a call within the user's extension Pickup
group, or a call received by a Telephone
Answering Machine (TAM) extension.
Call Pickup
• 1.4.1.2 Line
Preference—
Incoming
Feature Guide
35
1.4 Answering Features
1.4.1.2
Line Preference—Incoming
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following
3 line preferences.
Each of these line preferences can be selected by each extension through personal programming (Line
Preference—Incoming).
Type
Description
No Line
A user can select a line by pressing the desired Outside (CO) Line Access
button to answer an incoming call after going off-hook.
Prime Line
A user can answer a call arriving at a flexible CO button (assigned as the
"Prime Line") simply by going off-hook.
Ringing Line (default)
A user can answer a call ringing at one's own telephone simply by going
off-hook.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
Ringing methods can be selected from among immediate, delayed, no ringing, or no incoming calls
(disable) through system programming ( Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410], Delayed
Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]).
A single line telephone (SLT) user can select "Ringing Line" mode only.
A flexible CO button should be assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button (Single-CO [S-CO],
Group-CO [G-CO] or Other-CO [O-CO]) before selecting a line preference.
Setting a new line preference clears the previous line preference.
In "Prime Line" mode, if a PT user receives an incoming call on a line other than the "Prime Line", the
user must go off-hook and then press the corresponding flashing CO button to answer the call.
User Manual References
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
36
Feature Guide
1.4 Answering Features
1.4.1.3
Call Pickup
Description
An extension user can answer a call ringing at another extension by entering the appropriate feature
numbers.
The following types of Call Pickup are available:
Type
Description
Directed Call Pickup
A call to a specific extension is answered.
Group Call Pickup
A call to an extension in the same extension group (
[600]) is answered.
Extension Group
Call Retrieving from a
Telephone Answering
Machine (TAM)
A call received by a preprogrammed TAM extension (
[611]) is answered.
TAM Extension
Call Pickup Deny
An extension user can prevent other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his or her own extension. If
this feature is enabled, other users will hear a reorder tone when trying to pick up calls.
Conditions
[Directed/Group Call Pickup]
•
•
•
Call Pickup applies to:
Intercom calls, outside (CO) line calls, and doorphone calls.
An extension user will hear a confirmation tone when he or she picks up the call with the Directed Call
Pickup or Group Call Pickup feature. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming
( Call Pickup Tone [117]).
Calls from Hold Recall and Camp-on Recall cannot be picked up with the Directed/Group Call Pickup
feature.
[Group Call Pickup]
•
By setting system programming ( Pickup Group [127]) in advance, an extension user can pick up a
call to another extension in the same extension group simply by going off-hook, even if his or her
extension is not ringing.
User Manual References
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
Feature Guide
37
1.4 Answering Features
1.4.1.4
Hands-free Answerback
Description
A user with a speakerphone-equipped proprietary telephone (PT) can answer intercom calls automatically
without lifting the handset. When a call is received at an extension that is in Hands-free Answerback mode,
the caller hears a confirmation tone and the called extension hears a beep tone. Then the conversation is
automatically established.
Conditions
•
•
Hands-free Answerback applies to:
Intercom calls (not including outside (CO) line calls or doorphone calls)
When an intercom call/outside (CO) line call is transferred to an extension, this feature is overridden
and a ring tone is heard.
Feature Guide References
1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
User Manual References
1.3.2 Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback)
38
Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5
Making Call Features
1.5.1
Intercom Call Features
1.5.1.1
Intercom Call
Description
An extension user can call another extension user.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extension Number/Name Assignment
Extension numbers ( Extension Number [009]) and names ( Extension Name [604], Extension
Name in Cyrillic [616]) can be assigned to all extensions. During intercom calls, the number and name
of the other extension are shown on the displays of proprietary telephones (PTs).
DSS Button
It is possible to call another extension simply by pressing the corresponding Direct Station Selection
(DSS) button ( DSS Off-hook Mode [126]). A flexible CO/DSS/MESSAGE button can be customised
as a DSS button.
The DSS buttons on a DSS Console can also be used.
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming
(Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice). If a user selects voice-calling, the calling party can talk to the user
immediately after hearing a confirmation tone.
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
A caller can change the called party's preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice). By doing so,
ring-calling is switched to voice-calling, or vice versa, at the called party. This setting is active for the
current call only, after which it reverts to the called party's previous setting.
The extension ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls can be selected through system
programming ( Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]). The ringback tone pattern for outgoing intercom
calls and for incoming outside (CO) line calls can also be selected through system programming (
Ringback Tone Pattern [128]).
Tone after Dialling
After dialling an extension number, a user will hear one of the following:
Type
Description
Ringback Tone
Indicates the call is being received at the called party's extension.
Confirmation Tone
Indicates the called party has set voice-calling.
Busy Tone
Indicates the called party's extension is busy.
DND Tone
Indicates the called party has set Do Not Disturb (DND).
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
Feature Guide
39
1.5 Making Call Features
User Manual References
1.2.1 Basic Calling
1.2.5 Switching the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice)
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
40
Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2
1.5.2.1
Outside (CO) Line Call Features
Outside (CO) Line Call Features—OVERVIEW
Description
An extension user can use the following features when making an outside (CO) line call:
Feature
Description
Details in
Emergency Call
A user can dial preprogrammed emergency
• 1.5.2.2 Emergency
numbers regardless of the restrictions imposed on Call
the extension.
Account Code Entry
A user can enter an account code to identify
• 1.5.2.3 Account
outgoing calls for accounting and billing purposes. Code Entry
Pulse to Tone Conversion
A user can temporarily switch from Pulse mode to • 1.5.2.4 Dial Type
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) mode if
Selection
necessary.
Pause Insertion
A dialling pause can be manually inserted by
pressing the PAUSE button, or can be
automatically inserted after a user-dialled code,
such as a Host PBX Access code or Automatic
Pause Insertion code. The length of the pause can
be specified through system programming.
• 1.5.2.6 Pause
Insertion
• 1.5.2.7 Host PBX
Access Code
(Access Code to the
Telephone Company
from a Host PBX)
Feature Guide
41
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2.2
Emergency Call
Description
An extension user can dial preprogrammed emergency numbers ( Emergency Number [309]) after
seizing an outside (CO) line regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension.
Conditions
•
•
42
If the PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX, an extension user must dial the Host PBX Access
code after the Outside (CO) Line Access number.
This feature will function even when:
– In Account Code—Verify-All/Verify-Toll/Forced mode ( 1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry)
– Restricted by the current class of service (COS) ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS))
– In Extension Lock ( 1.8.3 Extension Lock)
Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2.3
Account Code Entry
Description
An account code is used to identify outgoing outside (CO) line calls for accounting and billing purposes.
Account codes are appended to SMDR call records ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)),
and have several uses. For example, a firm can use an account code for each client to determine which calls
were made for which client, and can submit a bill to the client according to the client's account code as
shown on the SMDR call record.
There are 4 methods of entering account codes, explained below. One method is assigned to each
extension through system programming ( Account Code Mode [605]).
Mode
Description
Option
An extension user can (but is not required to) enter a 4-digit account code
during a conversation or within 30 seconds after a conversation ends
when a record is needed.
Forced
An extension user must always enter a 4-digit account code within 5
seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line. This method ensures that
extension users will not forget to enter account codes.
Verify-All
An extension user must always enter a preprogrammed account code (
Account Code [310]) within 5 seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line.
If the entered code does not match any preprogrammed code, the user
will hear a reorder tone.
Verify-Toll
An extension user can enter a preprogrammed account code ( Account
Code [310]) within 5 seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line to override
TRS ( 1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code). Classes
of service (COSs) 3 through 5 will be changed temporarily to COS 2.
COSs 1 and 2 will not be affected. If the entered account code is also
registered as an extension password, the extension password feature will
be given priority. The COS of the corresponding extension will be applied.
Conditions
•
•
•
An account code can be stored in Memory Dialling (One-touch Dialling, Hot Line, Speed Dialling—
System/Personal, Call Forwarding (FWD) to Outside (CO) Line, etc.). In this case, the Account Code
feature number and specified account code must be entered after the Outside (CO) Line Access
number.
An extension user does not need to enter an account code for incoming outside (CO) line calls.
Even in Forced/Verify-All/Verify-Toll mode, emergency calls can be made without an account code (
1.5.2.2 Emergency Call).
User Manual References
1.2.1 Basic Calling
Feature Guide
43
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2.4
Dial Type Selection
Description
The dialling mode can be selected for each outside (CO) line through system programming ( Dial Mode
[401]) regardless of the originating extension (dependent on the contract with the telephone company).
Mode
Description
DTMF (Dual Tone MultiFrequency)
Numbers dialled by an extension user are transmitted to the outside (CO)
line using tones. If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX,
select this mode as necessary. If your telephone company or a host PBX
can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals but the contract specifies
DTMF lines, select this mode.
Pulse (Rotary)
Numbers dialled by an extension user are transmitted to the outside (CO)
line using pulses.
Call Blocking
If your telephone company or a host PBX can receive both DTMF and
Pulse signals but the contract specifies Pulse lines, select this mode.
When dialling with a touch-tone telephone, only Pulse signals will be sent
to the telephone company.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type
The dialling mode of connected outside (CO) lines is automatically assigned after restarting the PBX
using the System Clear Switch or through system programming ( System Data Clear [999]). No
system programming in Dial Mode [401] and Pulse Speed [402] is required unless the dialling mode of
the connected outside (CO) lines is Call Blocking. If your telephone company can receive both DTMF
and Pulse signals, the PBX selects an outside (CO) line type according to the following priority:
DTMF
Pulse (High)
Pulse (Low)
Pulse to Tone Conversion
It is possible for an extension user to temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF mode in order to
access special services such as computer-accessed long-distance calling or voice mail services. To
switch to DTMF mode, wait for a preprogrammed time period after the outside (CO) line is connected,
or press the " #" key. This feature functions only on outside (CO) lines set to "Pulse" or "Call Block"
mode ( Dial Mode [401]). DTMF mode cannot be changed to Pulse mode.
The pulse rate for outside (CO) lines that have been set to "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode ( Pulse
Speed [402]) should be selected depending on your telephone company or a host PBX. There are 2
pulse rates: Low (10 pps) and High (20 pps).
It is possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to outside (CO) lines that have
been set to "DTMF" mode ( DTMF Time [210]).
It is programmable whether DTMF dialling is sent to the telephone company when an extension user
redials after changing from Pulse mode to DTMF mode by pressing the " #" key ( Redialling after
Pulse to Tone Conversion [119]).
User Manual References
1.4.9 Changing the Dialling Mode (Pulse to Tone Conversion)
44
Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2.5
Reverse Circuit
Description
The PBX can detect the reverse signal sent from the telephone company when an extension user tries to
make an outside (CO) line call. This detects the start (the called party goes off-hook) and end (the called
party goes on-hook) of an outgoing outside (CO) line call. The duration of the call can be verified with SMDR
using this feature ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).
This feature is also known as Polarity Reverse Detection.
Conditions
•
If Reverse Signal Detection is enabled for an outside (CO) line ( Polarity Reverse Detection [424]),
the PBX will automatically start the timer ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]) immediately after the
outside party answers the call.
Feature Guide
45
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2.6
Pause Insertion
Description
A dialling pause of a preprogrammed length can be inserted manually or automatically when dialling.
Manual Pause Insertion: A pause can be manually inserted by pressing the PAUSE button.
Automatic Pause Insertion: A pause will be automatically inserted after the user dials any one of the
following numbers:
a) Outside (CO) Line Access number
b) Automatic Pause Insertion code
c) Host PBX Access code ( 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone
Company from a Host PBX))
Conditions
•
•
•
46
The pause length is programmable for each outside (CO) line ( Pause Time [417]).
When a dialled telephone number matches one of the Automatic Pause Insertion codes assigned
through system programming ( Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311]), a pause will be automatically
inserted after the code. This is particularly convenient if a second dial tone is sent from your telephone
company.
This feature functions for Speed Dialling, One-touch Dialling, Last Number Redial, Saved Number
Redial, Hot Line, and Call Forwarding—To Outside (CO) Line, as well as for normal calls.
Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2.7
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone
Company from a Host PBX)
Description
This PBX can be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is performed by connecting extension jacks of
the host PBX to outside (CO) line ports of this PBX. A Host PBX Access code, assigned through system
programming ( Host PBX Access Code [403]), is required to access the telephone company from the host
PBX. The Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0*1, or 81 through 83) of the host PBX should be stored as
a Host PBX Access code for each outside (CO) line of this PBX. A pause of a preprogrammed length (
Pause Time [417]) will be automatically inserted after the user-dialled Host PBX Access code.
[Example]
Telephone Company
Host PBX Access Code
for PBX, or Automatic Line
Access No. for Host PBX: 0
Host PBX
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Automatic Line
Access No.: 9
Extn. 101
Extn. 102
Outside (CO)
line 1
Dials "0-01-23-4567".
Host PBX
Access Code
PBX
Telephone
No.
Dials "9-0-01-23-4567".
Automatic Line
Access No.
Telephone No.
Host PBX
Access Code
Dials "9-101".
Automatic Line
Access No.
Extn. No.
of the Host PBX
Note
In this example, "0" should be assigned as the Host PBX Access code for outside (CO) line 1 of this
PBX.
*1
For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.
Feature Guide
47
1.5 Making Call Features
Conditions
•
•
•
48
Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible ( 1.10.7 External Feature Access
(EFA)).
TRS
TRS checks only the dialled telephone number, excluding the Host PBX Access code, when accessing
the telephone company through the host PBX ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)).
SMDR
The Host PBX Access code can be logged by SMDR along with the dialled number when accessing
the telephone company through the host PBX ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).
Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.3
1.5.3.1
Seizing a Line Features
Seizing a Line Features—OVERVIEW
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the line that is seized in order to make a call, using one of the
following features:
Feature
Description
Details in
Line Preference—Outgoing
A user can select the line to be seized when going off- • 1.5.3.2 Line
hook.
Preference—
Outgoing
Outside (CO) Line Access
A user can select the Outside (CO) Line Access
method used when making outside (CO) line calls.
• 1.5.3.3 Outside
(CO) Line Access
Feature Guide
49
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.3.2
Line Preference—Outgoing
Description
Through personal programming, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the preferred method of
seizing a line (Line Preference—Outgoing) to be used each time the user goes off-hook.
Method
Description
Idle Line
When a user goes off-hook, an idle outside (CO) line is selected
automatically from among the assigned outside (CO) lines ( Automatic
Designated Line Access [419]).
No Line
When a user goes off-hook, no line is selected. In order to make a call,
the user must select the desired line manually.
Prime Line
When a user goes off-hook, the preset line is selected automatically.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
A flexible CO button should be assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button (Single-CO [S-CO],
Group-CO [G-CO], or Other-CO [O-CO]) before selecting a line preference.
Setting a new line preference clears the previous line preference.
Line Preference Override
A user can override the preset line preference temporarily by pressing the desired Outside (CO) Line
Access button or INTERCOM button before going off-hook.
System programming determines the extension users that can make outside (CO) line calls in each
time service mode ( Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]).
It is possible to specify which outside (CO) lines are connected to the PBX ( CO Line Connection
[400]). This prevents extension users from trying to select or making calls using outside (CO) lines that
are not connected.
User Manual References
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
50
Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.3.3
Outside (CO) Line Access
Description
There are 3 methods of accessing an outside (CO) line.
Method
Automatic Line Access
(Local Access)
Description
Operation
Selects an idle outside (CO) line
automatically from the assigned
outside (CO) lines ( Automatic
Designated Line Access [419]).
If Idle Line Preference ( 1.5.3.2
Line Preference—Outgoing) is set on
the extension through personal
programming, the user can access an
idle line simply by going off-hook.
Dial the Automatic Line Access
number (9/0)* ( Automatic Line
Access [121]).
Note
* For New Zealand, the
Automatic Line Access
number may be either 1 or 9.
Outside (CO) Line Group
Access
Selects an idle outside (CO) line from Dial the Outside (CO) Line Group
the corresponding outside (CO) line Access number and an outside
group.
(CO) line group number, or press a
Group-CO (G-CO) button.
S-CO Line Access
Selects the desired outside (CO) line Press the Single-CO (S-CO)
directly.
button.
Line Access Using the Other-CO (O-CO) Button
To select an idle outside (CO) line from among the outside (CO) lines that are not assigned to S-CO or GCO buttons, the proprietary telephone (PT) user can press the O-CO button.
Conditions
•
•
The PBX waits for a preprogrammed length of time ( Dialling Start Time [206]) after seizing an
outside (CO) line before dialling.
Button Assignment
A flexible CO button can be customised as an S-CO, G-CO, or O-CO button as follows:
Type
•
Assignable parameter
Single-CO (S-CO)
A specified outside (CO) line is assigned (Default: CO 1–CO 3).
Group-CO (G-CO)
An outside (CO) line group is assigned (
[404]).
Other-CO (O-CO)
Outside (CO) lines that are not assigned to S-CO or G-CO buttons
are assigned.
CO Line Group Number
The same outside (CO) line group can be assigned to more than one G-CO button on the same PT.
The same outside (CO) line can be assigned to an S-CO button and a G-CO button.
Dialling the Outside (CO) Line Access number selects a CO button according to the following priority:
S-CO
G-CO
O-CO
Once a flexible CO button is assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button, it indicates line status
with a variety of light patterns ( 1.18.3 LED Indication).
Direct Outside (CO) Line Access
If a PT user is on-hook when pressing an idle CO button, the PT automatically enables hands-free
Feature Guide
51
1.5 Making Call Features
•
•
•
operation mode. The user can dial without lifting the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE or MONITOR
button.
Outside (CO) Line Hunting Order for Automatic Line Access
The outside (CO) line hunting sequence (from highest-numbered outside (CO) line, or in rotation) for
Automatic Line Access can be determined through system programming ( Automatic Rotation for CO
Line Access [122]).
System programming determines the extension users that can make outside (CO) line calls in each
time service mode ( Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]).
It is possible to specify which outside (CO) lines are connected to the PBX ( CO Line Connection
[400]). This prevents extension users from trying to select or making calls using outside (CO) lines that
are not connected.
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
User Manual References
1.2.1 Basic Calling
52
Feature Guide
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6
Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1
Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.1
Memory Dialling Features—OVERVIEW
Description
An extension user can store frequently dialled numbers in the PBX. A stored number can be dialled by a
simple operation.
1. Features
Feature
Storage Method
One-touch Dialling
Details in
Personal Programming, System Programming
• 1.6.1.2 Onetouch Dialling
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling System Programming
• 1.6.1.3 KXT7710 One-touch
Dialling
Redial
• 1.6.1.4 Redial
Last Number The last or most recently dialled number is
automatically stored.
Speed
Dialling
Saved
Number
While in a conversation with an outside party or
while hearing a busy tone, the current telephone
number can be manually stored and redialled
afterwards.
Personal
Personal Programming with the Feature Number • 1.6.1.5 Speed
Dialling—
System Programming
Personal/System
System
Quick Dialling
System Programming
• 1.6.1.6 Quick
Dialling
Hot Line
Personal Programming with the Feature Number • 1.6.1.7 Hot Line
Incoming Call Log
Caller ID information is automatically stored.
• 1.16.2 Incoming
Call Log
2. Valid Input
Displayed while
Entering
Input
Description
0–9/ /#
0–9/ /#
Store digits, , and # by pressing the
corresponding buttons.
PAUSE (Pause)
P
Store a dialling pause by pressing the PAUSE
button ( 1.5.2.6 Pause Insertion).
Feature Guide
53
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
Displayed while
Entering
Input
Description
FLASH/RECALL
(Hooking)*1
F
Store an EFA signal (EFA mode) by pressing the
FLASH/RECALL button at the beginning of the
number ( 1.10.7 External Feature Access
(EFA)).
INTERCOM (Secret)*1
[/]
Prevent all or part of a System Speed Dialling
number or One-touch Dialling number from being
displayed when a call is made, by pressing the
INTERCOM button at the beginning and at the
end of the number to be hidden (Secret Dialling).
It is programmable whether the hidden part will
be shown on SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)).
CONF (Hyphen)*2
-
Store a hyphen by pressing the CONF button.
*1 Available only when in system/personal programming mode
*2 Available only when in system programming mode
[Example of Secret Dialling]
When storing the number "91234567890", to prevent the telephone number "1234567890" from being
displayed when making a call:
Enter 9
Notes
•
•
INTERCOM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
INTERCOM .
The characters for secret code, "[" and "]" (entered by pressing the INTERCOM button), are
counted as one digit each.
It is not possible to hide the Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0*, or 81 through 83) by
pressing the INTERCOM button before dialling it.
* For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.
Conditions
•
54
Outside (CO) Line Access by Memory Dialling (One-touch Dialling/System Speed Dialling)
A specific Outside (CO) Line Access number can be stored along with the telephone number in Memory
Dialling. However, if Memory Dialling is performed after selecting an outside (CO) line, the stored
Outside (CO) Line Access number is ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected
outside (CO) line.
Feature Guide
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.2
One-touch Dialling
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can make a call or access a feature with a one-touch operation. This is
possible by storing the number (up to 24 digits), such as an extension number, telephone number, account
code, or feature number, in a One-touch Dialling button.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
One-touch Dialling Button
A flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS)/Programmable Feature (PF)/MESSAGE button can be
customised as a One-touch Dialling button.
A number consisting of 25 digits or more can be stored by dividing it and storing it in 2 One-touch
Dialling buttons. In this case, the Outside (CO) Line Access number should be stored in the first button.
Speed Dialling, One-touch Dialling, and manual dialling can be used in combination.
Personal Speed Dialling numbers (0 through 9) correspond to the numbers (F1 through F10) of the PF
buttons assigned as One-touch Dialling numbers.
Assigning a One-touch Dialling number to PF button "F1" will override Personal Speed Dialling number
"0", and vice versa.
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
User Manual References
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
Feature Guide
55
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.3
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
Description
The MESSAGE button and each of the 8 One-touch buttons on the KX-T7710 single line telephone (SLT)
can be customised to dial an extension number, telephone number, or feature number (up to 24 digits) when
the user presses that button. To allow easy configuration of multiple extensions, every KX-T7710 connected
to the PBX can be customised with the same settings at once, through system programming ( KX-T7710
One-touch Dialling [013]). This is useful for hotel room extensions or similar applications.
The KX-T7710 has 2 modes, "NORMAL" mode and "PBX" mode, selected by a switch on the telephone.
This feature is available only when the KX-T7710 is in "PBX" mode.
[Programming Example: KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling]
Location No.
Button
Desired Number
1
One-touch Dial 01
100 (Front Desk)
2
One-touch Dial 02
76XX (Wake-up Call)
3
One-touch Dial 03
102 (Restaurant)
(Cont.) :
:
:
:
:
:
9
MESSAGE
784#
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
System programming determines the SLTs that can receive the message waiting notifications left by
another extension ( SLT Message Waiting [619]).
If a user goes off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be
heard. The user can call a caller back or listen to the message simply by pressing the MESSAGE button
because the button includes the default value of Message Waiting Answer feature number.
Any feature number can be stored in a One-touch button. However, the feature numbers for Personal
Speed Dialling, System Speed Dialling, and Quick Dialling do not function.
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling is available to users while hearing a dial tone.
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling is not available to users when the KX-T7710 is connected in parallel with
a proprietary telephone (PT).
Please refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX-T7710 for additional information.
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
56
Feature Guide
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.4
Redial
Description
There are 2 types of Redial, described below.
Type
Description
Last Number Redial
Every extension automatically saves the last external telephone number
dialled, allowing the same number to be easily redialled.
Saved Number Redial
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can save a telephone number while in
a conversation with an outside party or while hearing a busy tone, and
then easily redial the number later. The saved number is kept until a new
number is stored.
Automatic Redial
If Last Number Redial or Saved Number Redial is performed in hands-free mode and the called party is
busy, the number will be automatically redialled a preprogrammed number of times ( Automatic Redial
Repeat Count [113]) at a preprogrammed interval ( Automatic Redial Interval [114]). This feature is only
available on PT models that have an SP-PHONE or MONITOR button.
Conditions
[General]
•
•
•
•
Up to 64 digits plus the Outside (CO) Line Access number can be stored and redialled for each Redial
type.
Automatic Redial is cancelled if any other number is dialled, or if an incoming call is answered.
Headset users cannot use the Automatic Redial feature.
Automatic Redial is not available for some countries/areas.
[Last Number Redial]
•
The stored telephone number is replaced whenever a new number is dialled.
[Saved Number Redial]
•
Save Button
A flexible CO button can be customised as a Save button.
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
User Manual References
1.2.3 Redialling
Feature Guide
57
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.5
Speed Dialling—Personal/System
Description
An extension user can use short numbers to frequently dialled numbers that are stored in the PBX, either
in the extension's Personal Speed Dialling or in System Speed Dialling.
Personal Speed Dialling is also known as Station Speed Dialling.
Conditions
[General]
•
•
Any number, such as a telephone number or feature number, can be stored in Personal Speed Dialling
(up to 24 digits) and System Speed Dialling (up to 32 digits).
This feature is not available on rotary single line telephones (SLTs).
[Personal Speed Dialling]
•
•
Personal Speed Dialling numbers (0 through 9) correspond to the numbers (F1 through F10) of the
Programmable Feature (PF) buttons assigned as One-touch Dialling numbers.
Assigning a One-touch Dialling number to PF button "F1" will override Personal Speed Dialling number
"0", and vice versa.
An SLT user can check the stored number by exchanging the SLT with a PT. PF buttons (F1 through
F10) correspond to Personal Speed Dialling numbers (0 through 9). Press the desired PF button to
check the number.
[System Speed Dialling]
•
•
•
•
TRS for System Speed Dialling ( TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301])
Calls made using System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the class of service (COS) of
System Speed Dialling numbers and the COS assigned to each extension ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction
(TRS)).
System Speed Dialling numbers ( System Speed Dialling Number [001]) and names ( System
Speed Dialling Name [011]) can be assigned through system programming. The assigned name will be
shown on the display of a proprietary telephone (PT) when an extension user makes calls using this
feature.
Caller's Name
If the dialled number matches a number stored in the System Speed Dialling table with an assigned
name, the assigned name will be shown on the display ( 1.16.1 Caller ID).
System Speed Dialling, One-touch Dialling, and manual dialling can be used in combination.
User Manual References
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
3.3.2 System Programming
58
Feature Guide
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.6
Quick Dialling
Description
Using Quick Dialling, an extension user can make a call or access a feature easily. This is possible by storing
the number (up to 10 digits), such as extension number, telephone number, or feature number, for Quick
Dialling through system programming ( Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]).
[Programming Example: Quick Dialling]
Code No.
Desired Number
50
#34
51
#43
(Cont.) :
:
:
:
59
912345678
In this example:
a) The feature number for Paging—External, "#34", is stored with the code number "50". Users can
make paging announcements by going off-hook and then dialling "50".
b) The feature number for Paging—Answer, "#43", is stored with the code number "51". Users can
answer paging announcements by going off-hook and then dialling "51".
c) A telephone number, "912345678", is stored with the code number "59". Users can call this outside
number by going off-hook and then dialling "59".
Conditions
•
This feature is available when "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected in Extension Number [009] (
Feature Numbering).
2.3.4
User Manual References
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
Feature Guide
59
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.7
Hot Line
Description
A single line telephone (SLT) user can make an outgoing call to a previously stored telephone number (up
to 32 digits) simply by going off-hook. If the Hot Line feature is set and the user goes off-hook, a special dial
tone (dial tone 2) is generated for a preprogrammed time period ( Hot Line Waiting Time [203]), and then
dialling starts. During this waiting time, the user can dial another party, overriding the Hot Line feature.
This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling.
Conditions
•
•
This feature cannot be programmed on rotary SLTs.
This feature will not function when the extension user goes off-hook to answer an incoming call or
retrieve a call on hold.
User Manual References
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
60
Feature Guide
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7
Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7.1
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
Description
If the dialled extension or outside (CO) line is busy when a call is made, the caller can choose to be informed
by a callback ring (Camp-on Recall) when the extension or outside (CO) line becomes free.
When the user answers the callback ring:
For an intercom call: The called extension starts ringing without the user having to redial.
For an outside (CO) line call: The line is seized.
Conditions
•
•
If the callback ring is not answered within 10 seconds (4 rings), the callback is cancelled.
More than one extension user can set this feature to monitor the same destination extension or outside
(CO) line at the same time.
User Manual References
1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
Feature Guide
61
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7.2
Executive Busy Override
Description
An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a 3-party conference call.
Executive Busy Override Deny
It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being interrupted by another extension user.
Conditions
•
•
•
System programming determines extension users who can use Executive Busy Override ( Executive
Busy Override [608]).
This feature will not function when the busy extension has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data
Line Security ( 1.10.5 Data Line Security).
When a 2-party conversation is changed to a 3-party conference call, a confirmation tone will be sent
to all parties ( 1.13.1.2 Conference). It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming
( Conference Tone [105]).
User Manual References
1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
1.7.4 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override Deny)
62
Feature Guide
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7.3
Call Waiting Tone
Description
When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension (i.e., an extension that is ringing or having a
conversation), a call waiting tone will be sent to the called extension to indicate another call is waiting.
Conditions
•
•
This feature functions only if the called extension has activated Call Waiting. If it is activated, the calling
extension will hear a ringback tone.
One of 2 call waiting tones (Tone 1 or Tone 2) can be selected through personal programming (Call
Waiting Tone Type Selection). For doorphone calls, Tone 1 is used as a call waiting tone (not
changeable). Tone 2 depends on the assignments in CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423] for outside (CO)
line calls and in Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] for intercom calls.
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.5 Call Waiting
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
User Manual References
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
Feature Guide
63
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
1.8
Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
1.8.1
Toll Restriction (TRS)
Description
Toll Restriction (TRS) can prohibit certain extension users from making unauthorised outside (CO) line calls.
Every extension is assigned to one of 5 classes of service (COSs) for each time service mode ( TRSCOS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]); COS 1 grants the highest level of authorisation, allowing all outside
(CO) line calls to be made, and COS 5 grants the lowest level of authorisation. COSs 2 through 5 are used
to restrict calls with a combination of preprogrammed Denied and Exception Code Tables, explained below.
Denied Code Tables ( TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305])
Denied Code Tables are preprogrammed lists containing the telephone numbers that are restricted. All
outgoing outside (CO) line calls made by COS 2 through 5 users are compared to the applicable Denied
Code Table(s), and when the leading number of a dialled telephone number (not including the Outside (CO)
Line Access number) matches an entry found in an applicable table, the call is denied.
Up to a total of 80 denied codes, each consisting of up to 11 digits, can be stored.
Exception Code Tables ( TRS—Exception Code [306])
Exception Code Tables are preprogrammed lists of leading digits or complete telephone numbers that are
checked against every dialled number prohibited by a Denied Code Table. When a dialled number is
prohibited by a Denied Code Table, it is compared to the applicable Exception Code Table(s). If the dialled
number matches an entry found in an applicable Exception Code Table, the call is permitted.
Up to 80 exception codes, each consisting of up to 11 digits, can be stored. The available number of codes
depends on the COS assigned to each extension.
Applicable tables by COS
The Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables that apply to each COS are listed below.
COS No.
Exception Code Tables
No restriction.
(Not Programmable)
No restriction.
(Not Programmable)
20 denied codes programmed in [302].
(Table for Class 2)
80 exception codes (code numbers 01–80)
programmed in [306].
(Tables for Classes 2 through 5)
3
40 denied codes programmed in [302] and
[303].
(Tables for Classes 2 and 3)
60 exceptions codes (code numbers 01–60)
programmed in [306].
(Tables for Classes 3 through 5 )
4
60 denied codes programmed in [302]
through [304].
(Tables for Classes 2 through 4)
40 exception codes (code numbers 01–40)
programmed in [306].
(Tables for Classes 4 and 5)
5
80 denied codes programmed in [302]
through [305].
(Tables for Classes 2 through 5)
20 exception codes (code numbers 01–20)
programmed in [306].
(Table for Class 5)
1
2
64
Denied Code Tables
Feature Guide
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
COS 1
All outside (CO) line calls permitted.
COS 2
Class 2 restriction
Class 2 – 5 exceptions
COS 3
Class 2 – 3 restrictions
Class 3 – 5 exceptions
COS 4
Class 2 – 4 restrictions
Class 4 – 5 exceptions
COS 5
Class 2 – 5 restrictions
Class 5 exception
Calls are restricted
Calls are permitted
TRS for System Speed Dialling ( TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301])
Calls made using System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the COS of System Speed Dialling
numbers and the COS assigned to each extension. If, for example, the COS of System Speed Dialling
numbers is assigned as "2", the PBX will allow System Speed Dialling calls for the extensions with COSs 1
and 2, but not allow System Speed Dialling calls for the extensions with COSs 3, 4, and 5 according to TRS
as follows:
System Speed Dialling Class
COS No.
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Permitted
Feature Guide
65
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
[Flowchart]
An extension user tries to make
an outside (CO) line call.
Was the number dialled using
System Speed Dialling?
Yes
No
Yes
Is the COS number higher
than the System Speed
Dialling Class?
No or Equal
What is the COS number?
COS 1
COSs 2–5
Is the dialled number found in an
applicable Denied Code Table?
No
Yes
Is the dialled number found in an
applicable Exception Code Table?
Yes
No
The call is denied.
The user hears a reorder tone.
The call is permitted.
Conditions
WARNING
The software contained in the TRS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to
recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into
service.
Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as
they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the
network and to these codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.
•
•
66
Emergency numbers, such as the police or fire services, should be stored ( Emergency Number
[309]) so that they are not barred by TRS.
Host PBX Access Code/Carrier Exception Code
TRS checks can be carried out on telephone numbers dialled using a Host PBX Access code (
Feature Guide
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)) or Carrier
Exception code.
Access Code is stored in the PBX
Access Code Type
Access Code is dialled
•
•
Access Code is not
stored in the PBX
Host PBX Access
Code*1
TRS ignores the code
and checks the
remaining digits.
Number dialled is not an TRS checks the entire
outside (CO) line call, so number.
TRS does not check the
number.
Carrier Exception
Code*2
TRS ignores the code
and checks the
remaining digits.
TRS checks the entire
number.
*1
*2
•
Access Code is not
dialled
TRS checks the entire
number.
Host PBX Access Code [403]
Carrier Exception Code [300]
The inter-digit timer ( Inter-digit Time [208]) applies until the TRS check is completed. When the timer
expires, the outgoing outside (CO) line call is disconnected while dialling, if enabled through system
programming ( No Dial Disconnection [211]). For a single line telephone (SLT), an outgoing outside
(CO) line call will be released from the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) receiver when the inter-digit
timer expires.
TRS—Extension Lock Class
The COS of extensions locked by the Extension Lock or Remote Extension Lock feature ( 1.8.3
Extension Lock) can be assigned ( TRS—Extension Lock Class [312]) so that even a locked
extension can make outside (CO) line calls. The higher COS number will take precedence. If, for
example, COS 3 is assigned to an extension ( TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]) and the COS
of locked extensions is assigned as "4", when the extension is locked, the PBX allows the extension
user to make outside (CO) line calls using COS 4.
The PBX can also be programmed to perform a TRS check for numbers that contain nondigits ( or #)
( TRS Check for * and # [125]). If TRS check is disabled, the PBX ignores any nondigits that are
dialled when checking, which is useful in preventing some unauthorised calls.
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Feature Guide
67
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
1.8.2
Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code
Description
An extension user can override TRS temporarily to make a toll call from a toll-restricted telephone ( 1.8.1
Toll Restriction (TRS)). The extension user can carry out this feature by entering the appropriate account
code before dialling the telephone number ( Account Code [310]).
[Flowchart]
TRS Override by Account
Code is attempted.
Option/
Forced
Verify–All
What is the account code mode?
Verify–Toll
Does the entered
account code match an extension
password?
Yes
Does the entered
account code match a stored
account code?
Yes
No
No
No
Does the entered
account code match a stored
account code?
Yes
Yes
Is the COS number "1"?
No
The call is established
with COS 2.
The call is established with
the COS number of the
corresponding extension.
The COS number
remains the same as that
of the extension being used.
68
Feature Guide
The call is denied.
The user hears a reorder tone.
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
Conditions
•
•
•
•
This feature functions only for extensions whose:
– Account code mode is set to "Verify-Toll" ( Account Code Mode [605]).
– Class of service (COS) number is set to 3 through 5.
If the extension user does not enter an account code or enters an invalid account code, an ordinary
TRS check is performed.
System programming determines whether SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)) logs the 4-digit account code or the 2-digit index of the account code when an extension user
makes a call using this feature ( SMDR Account Code [805]).
It is also possible to override TRS at another extension using the Walking COS feature ( 1.8.4
Walking COS).
Feature Guide References
1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry
Feature Guide
69
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
1.8.3
Extension Lock
Description
Extension users can lock their telephones to prevent unauthorised use. This is useful for situations when
extension users must leave their desks temporarily. Any 4-digit code can be used to lock and unlock an
extension.
This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
Remote Extension Lock
An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can remotely lock or unlock an extension
using a Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console. This feature functions only if the operator or manager
has set the extension password. When the operator or manager locks an extension remotely, the
extension's user cannot unlock it. When a user locks an extension, the operator or manager extension
can override the lock and unlock the extension.
This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control.
TRS—Extension Lock Class
The class of service (COS) of extensions locked by the Extension Lock or Remote Extension Lock
feature can be assigned ( TRS—Extension Lock Class [312]) so that even a locked extension can
make outside (CO) line calls. The higher COS number will take precedence. If, for example, COS 3 is
assigned to an extension ( TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]) and the COS of locked
extensions is assigned as "4", when the extension is locked, the PBX allows the extension user to make
outside (CO) line calls using COS 4.
Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL
The operator or manager can cancel this feature for all extensions simultaneously.
Extension Lock Button
A flexible DSS button on a DSS Console can be customised as an Extension Lock button.
This feature also functions as Incoming Call Log Display Lock ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log).
The Incoming Call Log for the common area can only be locked or unlocked by the operator and
manager.
This feature will not block Emergency Calls ( 1.5.2.2 Emergency Call).
Feature Guide References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
User Manual References
1.5.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension Lock)
2.1.1 Locking Other Extensions (Remote Extension Lock)
2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
70
Feature Guide
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
1.8.4
Walking COS
Description
Extension users can temporarily assign their own class of service (COS) to another extension, allowing
them to make calls as if from their own telephones.
This feature is useful when a manager or supervisor needs to borrow another employee's telephone to make
a call. The superior enters the extension password followed by the Walking COS feature number and his or
her extension number, and then makes the call. The same privileges and restrictions normally applied to a
user are applied when using Walking COS.
Conditions
•
When making a call with Walking COS, the extension number of the Walking COS user's extension is
also logged by SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
User Manual References
1.2.6 Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Walking COS)
2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode
Feature Guide
71
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
1.9
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
1.9.1
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Description
The PBX automatically selects the least expensive route (carrier) available at the time a long-distance call
is made on an outside (CO) line that has Automatic Route Selection (ARS) enabled. In order to use ARS
effectively, various ARS-related tables must be preprogrammed to tell the PBX which calls should be placed
using which carriers.
72
Feature Guide
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
[Flowchart]
A long-distance
call is made.
A
Is (another) one digit
dialled within the ARS
Inter-digit Time?
No
Yes
Each time a digit is dialled, the PBX checks
the dialled number (other than Host PBX
Access codes, Carrier Exception codes, and
First Carrier Access code).
Is the dialled
number a TRS Denied Code?
Yes
Reorder tone
No
The dialled number is sent to
the telephone company.
Is the dialled number an
Emergency Call number?
Yes
No
Yes
Is the dialled number
a TRS Denied Code?
Reorder tone
No
*1
Does the dialled
number include the First Carrier
Access code?
Yes
The dialled number (other than the First Carrier
Access code) is sent to the telephone company.
No
Checks the Routing Plan Table (1–4)
to determine which carrier to use.
*4
*3
*2
Does the leading
number match the Route 1–4
Selection Code?
Yes
Does the leading
number match the Route 1–4
Exception Code?
No
Digits are removed
from the dialled
number as required.
Yes
No
*5
Digits are added to
the dialled number
as required.
Are 7 digits
(other than Host PBX
Access codes, Carrier Exception
codes, and First Carrier Access
code) dialled?
*6
The corresponding
Routing Plan Table
is selected.
No
Yes
The dialled number is sent
to the telephone company.
Goes to A
Feature Guide
73
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
[Programming Procedures]
1. ARS Mode (
ARS Selection [350])
Turn on ARS for each outside (CO) line.
2. First Carrier Access Code*1
Enter the carrier's access code, such as the Host PBX Access code ( Host PBX Access Code [403]),
Carrier Exception code ( Carrier Exception Code [300]), or First Carrier Access code ( 1st Carrier
Selection Code [359]). For example, if the dialled number is "000-93-425-9477" and the First Carrier
Access code is assigned as "000", the modified number is "93-425-9477". Consult your carrier for more
information.
3. Routing Plan Table
Leading Number*2 ( Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354])
Store the leading numbers of telephone numbers that should be routed by ARS.
Leading Number Exception*3 ( Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358])
Store the telephone numbers that will bypass ARS here.
Note that the Outside (CO) Line Access number is always ignored by ARS and does not need to be
programmed here.
Calls that are exempt from ARS are connected via the default carrier for that line.
Removed Number of Digits*4 ( ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360])
There may be circumstances where the user-dialled number must be modified in order for the carrier
to connect the call. In this case, store the number of digits to be removed automatically from the
beginning of the dialled number here.
Added Number*5 ( ARS Modification—Added Number [361])
Store the number to be added automatically to the beginning of the dialled number here.
ARS Outside (CO) Line Group*6 ( ARS CO Line Group [364])
When making outside (CO) line calls using the Automatic Line Access number (9/0)*, assign the outside
(CO) line group(s) for each Routing Plan number here.
An outside (CO) line belonging to the assigned outside (CO) line group(s) is automatically seized when
making calls using the Automatic Line Access number, and the dialled number is applied to one of the
Routing Plan numbers.
Note
*
For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.
First
Carrier
Outside
(CO) Line
1
2
Group 1
Feature Guide
Second
Carrier
050
(Long-distance Call)
Third
Carrier
05000
(International Call)
Mobile
Jack
PBX
74
Local Call
3
Group 2
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
[Programming Example: Routing Plan Table]
Modification
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Routing
Plan No.
Leading
No.*1
Leading No.
Exception*2
Removed No.
of Digits*3
Added No.*4
ARS Outside (CO)
Line Group*5
1
4,5
07
0
050
All
2
9,0
07
0
050
1
3
07
Not Stored
2
05000
1
4
6
Not Stored
0
Not Stored
2
Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354]
Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358]
ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360]
ARS Modification—Added Number [361]
ARS CO Line Group [364]
In this example:
Dialled Number
Modified Number
Description
9-43-425-9477
050-43-425-9477
A long-distance call is made using Routing Plan 1
when the Automatic Line Access number is
assigned to "9".
9-54-123-4567
050-54-123-4567
A long-distance call is made using Routing Plan 1
when the Automatic Line Access number is
assigned to "9".
9-93-425-9477
050-93-425-9477
A long-distance call via outside (CO) line group 1
is made using Routing Plan 2.
9-04-123-4567
050-04-123-4567
A long-distance call via outside (CO) line group 1
is made using Routing Plan 2.
9-07-81-92-477-1450
050-00-81-92-477-1450 An international call via outside (CO) line group 1
is made using Routing Plan 3.
9-6-123456
6-123456
A mobile telephone call via outside (CO) line
group 2 is made using Routing Plan 4.
4. Authorisation Code & Itemised Billing Code Table
Authorisation Code ( Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384])
An Authorisation code for each carrier can be assigned for each outside (CO) line, if required by the
carrier. The registered codes are not shown on proprietary telephone (PT) displays or System Data
Dump printouts ( System Data Dump [804]) after programming, but "Already Set" will be shown
instead.
Itemised Billing Code ( Itemised Billing Code [389])
An Itemised Billing code can be assigned for each extension. It is possible to add the Itemised Billing
code assigned to an extension to the Authorisation code for the carrier for each outside (CO) line
through system programming ( Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]).
Feature Guide
75
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
Sequence of Transmitted Code ( Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390])
The sequence of transmitted codes (C: Carrier Access Code; A: Authorisation Code; I: Itemised Billing
Code; H: Telephone Number) can be selected. When "C.I.A.H" is selected, the dialled numbers of
Itemised Billing Code (I) and Authorisation Code (A) are shown on the displays of PTs and SMDR (
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).
[Programming Example: Authorisation & Itemised Billing Code Table]
Modification
Authorisation
Code*1
Routing
Plan No.
Leading
No.
1
8
0
11223344
0123456789
(on CO 1/2)
2
5
0
11223344PPPP
#012345
(PPPP: 6 s,
#: Pulse to
Tone Conversion
( 1.5.2.4 Dial
Type Selection))
67890123456 Enable (on CO 1)
789 (on CO 1) (Itemised Billing Code:
Extn. 101)
Removed
No. of Digits
Added No.
Itemised Billing*2
Enable (on CO 1/2)
(Itemised Billing Code:
Extn. 101)
Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384]
Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]
*1
*2
In this example:
Dialled Number
9-893-425-9477
(Extn. 101)
Modified Number
Pulse*1
Tone
11223344-P*2-0123456789-101-893-425-9477
Added No.
Pulse*1 (
Authorisation Itemised Telephone
Code Billing Code No.
Dial Mode [401])
P (Pause)*2 (
9-593-425-9477
(Extn. 101)
76
Feature Guide
Pause Time [417])
Description
A call via provider
access is made using
Routing Plan 1 when the
Automatic Line Access
number is assigned to
"9".
The Authorisation code
and the Itemised Billing
code are transmitted in
tone mode.
The pause time is
automatically inserted
before entering the
Authorisation code.
A call via provider
access is made using
11223344-PPPP-012345-P-67890123456789-101-593-425-9477
Routing Plan 2 when the
Automatic Line Access
number is assigned to
Added No.
Authorisation Itemised Telephone
"9".
Code
Billing Code
No.
Pulse
Tone
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
Conditions
WARNING
The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to
recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into
service.
Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as
they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the
network and to these codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.
•
•
•
•
•
ARS Inter-digit Time
The inter-digit time used while the PBX is checking the dialled number for the ARS feature can be
specified through system programming ( ARS Inter-digit Time [363]).
TRS
TRS checks are performed before ARS number modification, so programme TRS Denied Code Tables
and Exception Code Tables accordingly ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)).
If an extension user makes calls using the Automatic Line Access number, and the leading number of
a dialled telephone number does not match any entries found in the Leading Number, an outside (CO)
line enabled in Automatic Designated Line Access [419] is automatically seized.
The PBX checks the number repeatedly until 7 digits have been dialled.
If an extension user makes an outside (CO) line call by directly pressing a Single-CO (S-CO), GroupCO (G-CO), or Other-CO (O-CO) button or by dialling an assigned Outside (CO) Line Group Access
number, and the seized outside (CO) line has been enabled in ARS Selection [350], the call is made
with the ARS feature.
Feature Guide
77
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.1 Hands-free Operation
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can talk to another party without lifting the handset. Pressing specific
buttons automatically activates hands-free mode.
Conditions
•
•
•
PTs with the MONITOR Button
PTs with the MONITOR button can dial in hands-free mode but cannot have hands-free conversations.
Hands-free mode is cancelled if an extension user does not start dialling within 10 seconds.
This feature can be used by pressing the following buttons when the indicator of the SP-PHONE/
MONITOR button is off:
– SP-PHONE button
– MONITOR button
– INTERCOM button
– CO button
User Manual References
1.4.8 Talking to Another Party without Lifting the Handset (Hands-free Operation)
78
Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.2 Room Monitor
Description
An extension user can monitor a room or a door through another proprietary telephone (PT) or a doorphone
without the destination party knowing.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
To monitor using this feature, an extension must have a PT with an AUTO ANS/MUTE button or a single
line telephone (SLT) with a MUTE button. To be monitored using this feature, an extension must have
a PT with an AUTO ANS/MUTE button.
System programming determines the extensions that can be monitored using this feature ( Room
Monitor [612]).
A doorphone access tone will be sent to a monitored doorphone before monitoring starts ( 1.15.1
Doorphone Call). If an extension user wants to monitor a doorphone without informing the other party,
it is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Doorphone Access Tone [707]).
Access tones will not be sent to a monitored PT. Paging tones will also not be received by a monitored
PT.
User Manual References
1.7.9 Monitoring a Room (Room Monitor)
Feature Guide
79
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.3 Microphone Mute
Description
During a conversation, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can disable the built-in microphone to consult
privately with others in the room while listening to the other party on the phone through the built-in speaker.
When Microphone Mute is active, the user can hear the other party's voice, but the user's voice is muted.
Conditions
•
This feature is only available on PTs that have an AUTO ANS/MUTE button.
User Manual References
1.4.6 Muting a Microphone (Microphone Mute)
80
Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.4 Headset Operation
Description
This PBX supports headset-compatible proprietary telephones (PTs). A PT user can talk to another party
without lifting the handset by using an optional headset.
For connection and operation, refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset.
This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection.
Conditions
•
•
•
Headset users cannot use the Automatic Redial feature ( 1.6.1.4 Redial).
To set headset mode on a PT, use the handset/headset selector located on the telephone and/or on the
headset.
If headset mode is on, pressing the SP-PHONE button activates the headset, not the built- in speaker.
User Manual References
1.4.7 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
Feature Guide
81
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.5 Data Line Security
Description
Once Data Line Security is set on an extension, communication between the extension and the other party
is protected from signals such as Call Waiting, Hold Recall, and Executive Busy Override. Extensions that
have devices such as modems, fax machines, or Voice Processing Systems (VPSs) connected to them may
set this feature to maintain secure data transmission, by blocking tones or other interruptions during
communication.
User Manual References
1.7.6 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line Security)
82
Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.6 Flash/Recall
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can use the FLASH/RECALL button to disconnect the current call and
start another call without hanging up. For example, if this button is used to disconnect an outside (CO) line,
the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the same outside (CO) line.
Conditions
•
FLASH/RECALL Button Mode
One of the following modes can be selected through system programming (
[110]):
Flash/Recall Key Mode
a) MODE 1: EFA mode (
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA))
An EFA signal is sent for the specified duration ( Flash/Recall Time [418]).
b) MODE 2: Flash/Recall mode
•
•
•
A flash/recall signal is sent when the FLASH/RECALL button is pressed if the length of time that
the button is pressed is longer than the specified duration ( Flash/Recall Time [418]). If the
length of time that the button is pressed is shorter than the specified duration, an EFA signal will
be sent for the specified duration.
This feature functions only if the FLASH/RECALL button is set to "MODE 2: Flash/Recall mode".
Disconnect Time
The amount of time between successive accesses to the same outside (CO) line is programmable for
each outside (CO) line ( Disconnect Time [422]).
Pressing the FLASH/RECALL button restarts the conversation duration, outputs an SMDR call record
( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)) and checks the Toll Restriction (TRS) class of
service (COS) number again. The notation "F/" will be logged along with the new dial number on SMDR.
Feature Guide
83
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Description
An extension user can access features of a host PBX or the telephone company, such as Call Waiting. An
EFA (External Feature Access) signal is sent to the host PBX or the telephone company. This feature is only
available during outside (CO) line calls, including Host PBX Access ( 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code
(Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)).
Conditions
•
•
This feature functions only if the FLASH/RECALL button is set to "MODE 1: EFA mode" ( 1.10.6
Flash/Recall). It is also possible to perform this feature by entering the EFA feature number when the
current call is placed on consultation hold ( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold).
Flash/Recall Time
The length of an EFA signal can be selected for each outside (CO) line ( Flash/Recall Time [418]).
User Manual References
1.8.2 If a Host PBX is Connected
84
Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation
Description
Outside (CO) line calls are limited by the following features:
Feature
Description
Extension-to-Outside (CO)
Line Call Duration
When a call between an extension user and an outside party is
established, the call duration is restricted by a timer ( Extension-to-CO
Line Call Duration [212]). Both parties will hear a warning tone at 5second intervals 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer
expires, the call is disconnected. System programming determines which
extensions have calls limited by this feature ( CO Line Call Duration
Limitation [613]). This timer applies to outside (CO) line calls that are
made via the PBX.
Outside-to-Outside (CO-toCO) Line Call Duration
When a call between 2 outside parties is established, the call duration is
restricted by a timer ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties
will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the
timer expires, the call is disconnected.
Conditions
•
•
•
Lockout
If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, the call between both parties will be disconnected. A
reorder tone is sent to the off-hook party before the call is disconnected. No operation is necessary.
When an extension user seizes an outside (CO) line and then transfers the call to another extension
user who can use this feature, the Extension-to-Outside (CO) Line Call Duration timer starts after the
transferred call is answered by the outside party.
The Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Call Duration feature applies to the following calls:
– Calls forwarded by the FWD to Outside (CO) Line feature ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))
– Calls transferred by the Call Transfer to Outside (CO) Line feature ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer)
– Calls using the DISA feature ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))
– Calls using the Unattended Conference feature ( 1.13.1.2 Conference)
Feature Guide
85
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone
Description
Any proprietary telephone (PT) can be connected in parallel with a single line device, such as a single line
telephone (SLT), fax machine, or modem.
When parallel mode is used, the 2 telephones function as follows:
•
Both share one extension number.
•
Either telephone or device can make or answer calls.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System programming determines the SLTs that can be connected in parallel with a PT ( Parallelled
Telephone [610]).
When the SLT is in operation, the display and LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicator on the paired PT will
function in the same way as when the PT is in operation.
The following features cannot be used with an SLT connected in parallel with a PT:
– Call Splitting
– Conference
– Door Open while connected to the doorphone
– External Feature Access (EFA)
– Hot Line
An SLT connected in parallel with a PT will not ring if the PT is:
– In Hands-free Answerback mode ( 1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback).
– In Voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice) ( 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call).
An extension user cannot make a call from the SLT if the PT is:
– Playing background music (BGM)
– Receiving a paging announcement over the built-in speaker
– In programming mode
Both the PT and the SLT will ring for incoming calls (if the ringer is turned on).
If one telephone goes off-hook while the other telephone is having a call, a 3-party conference call will
be established. If one telephone goes on-hook, the other telephone will continue with the call.
Installation Manual References
2.5.2 Connecting Extensions in Parallel
86
Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
Description
A CPC (Calling Party Control) signal is an on-hook indication (disconnect signal) sent from an outside (CO)
line when the other party hangs up. To maintain efficient utilisation of outside (CO) lines, the PBX monitors
each line's status and when a CPC signal is detected on a line, the PBX disconnects the line and alerts the
extension with a reorder tone.
Conditions
•
•
•
CPC Signal Detection is programmable for incoming outside (CO) line calls ( CPC Signal
Detection—Incoming [420]) and for outgoing outside (CO) line calls ( CPC Signal Detection—
Outgoing [421]).
If a CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the DISA feature ( 1.15.6 Direct
Inward System Access (DISA)) and an extension or an outside party, the call will be disconnected.
It is possible to select whether the PBX detects the reverse signal from incoming outside (CO) line calls
for the duration ( CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420]) specified through system programming (
Incoming Reverse [153]).
Feature Guide
87
1.11 Transferring Features
1.11 Transferring Features
1.11.1 Call Transfer
Description
An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or to an outside party.
The following features are available:
Feature
Transferring method
With Announcement
Transfer is completed after announcing the transfer to the destination
party.
Without Announcement
Transfer is completed without an announcement.
After dialling the destination extension number and hearing a ringback
tone or busy tone, the originator can replace the handset.
Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Screened.
Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Unscreened.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
88
System programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer calls to an outside party (
Call Transfer to CO Line [606]). Single line telephone (SLT) users cannot transfer calls to an outside
party.
Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement
If the transfer destination extension does not answer within a preprogrammed time period ( Transfer
Recall Time [201]), the call will return to the extension that transferred the call. If there is no answer for
30 minutes after Transfer Recall starts, the call will be disconnected.
Camp-on Transfer for Call Transfer without Announcement
Call Transfer without Announcement is possible while hearing a busy tone, or while hearing a ringback
tone after executing Busy Station Signalling (BSS). When the destination extension becomes idle, the
transferred call starts ringing automatically at that extension. This is called Camp-on Transfer.
One-touch Transfer
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console users and proprietary telephone (PT) users can hold an outside
(CO) line call and quickly transfer it to an extension by pressing the DSS button directly ( One-touch
Transfer Using a DSS Button [005]).
A flexible CO/DSS/MESSAGE button can also be customised as a DSS button.
Music, if available, is sent to the held outside party while the call is being transferred ( 1.12.4 Music
on Hold). An internal audio source, external audio source, or tone can be selected as the Music on Hold
through system programming ( Music on Hold [111]).
Outside (CO) Line Call Duration
If an outside (CO) line call is transferred to an outside party, the call duration will be restricted by a
system timer ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds
before the timer expires ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation). The extension that transferred
the call will also hear a ring tone or an alarm tone 50 seconds before the timer expires ( 1.12.1 Call
Hold). When the timer expires, the call is disconnected unless the extension joins the conversation
again.
If a CPC (Calling Party Control) signal or reverse signal is received from an outside (CO) line, the
corresponding call between 2 outside parties will be disconnected.
Feature Guide
1.11 Transferring Features
•
Consultation Hold
When a transferring party presses the TRANSFER button on a PT or the Recall/hookswitch on an SLT,
the transferred party is automatically placed on consultation hold ( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold).
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
User Manual References
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Feature Guide
89
1.12 Holding Features
1.12 Holding Features
1.12.1 Call Hold
Description
An extension user can put a call on hold. The following Call Hold features are available:
Feature
Description
General Call Hold
Any extension user can retrieve a held call.
Exclusive Call Hold
Only the proprietary telephone (PT) user who held the call can retrieve it.
Pressing the HOLD button multiple times alternates between General and Exclusive Call Hold.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
90
Using the Call Hold feature, a PT user can have one intercom call and multiple outside (CO) line calls
on hold at the same time. To hold multiple intercom calls, the user should use the Call Park feature (
1.12.2 Call Park). Using the Call Hold feature, a single line telephone (SLT) user can have either one
intercom call or one outside (CO) line call on hold. To hold multiple calls, the user should use the Call
Park feature.
If an outside party is placed on hold and the call is not retrieved within 30 minutes, the call is
automatically disconnected.
Music on Hold
Music, if available, is sent to the outside party on hold ( 1.12.4 Music on Hold). An internal audio
source, external audio source, or tone can be selected as the Music on Hold through system
programming ( Music on Hold [111]).
Doorphone calls cannot be put on hold.
Hold Recall
If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period ( Hold Recall Time [200]), a ring
tone will be heard at the extension that put the call on hold. If the extension is engaged in a call when
the timer expires, an alarm tone will be heard. If the hold recall time is set to "Disable", no tone will be
heard. Going off-hook after the hold recall time has expired automatically re-establishes the
conversation with the call on hold.
SLT Hold Mode
It is possible to choose how to hold and transfer a call with an SLT, if the length of time that the Recall/
hookswitch is pressed is shorter than a specified duration ( Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]).
The following methods ( SLT Hold Mode [104]) are available:
Mode
Hold
Transfer to Extension
Hold-1
Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
+
Going on-hook
Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
+
Extension No.
Feature Guide
1.12 Holding Features
Mode
Hold
Transfer to Extension
Hold-2
Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
+
Call Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
+
Extension No.
Hold-3
Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
+
Call Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Pressing the Recall/hookswitch
+
Call Hold Feature No.
+
Extension No.
In some cases, a call is not disconnected when an SLT user goes on-hook. Instead, the call is
mistakenly placed on hold. After a specified time expires, the Hold Recall tone is heard. When the SLT
user answers this, the user hears a cyclic tone (like a reorder tone). To avoid this problem, select "Hold2" or "Hold-3". In either of these modes, all calls are disconnected when going on-hook, unless the Call
Hold feature number is entered after pressing the Recall/hookswitch.
It is possible to set each SLT not to receive pulse signals through system programming ( Internal
Pulse Detection [614]). This setting helps the PBX to avoid mistaking pulse signals sent by dialling "1"
for hooking, in the countries/areas where the length of time that the Recall/hookswitch is pressed is set
to "MODE 1: 50–180 ms" in Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207].
Feature Guide References
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
User Manual References
1.4.2 Holding a Call
Feature Guide
91
1.12 Holding Features
1.12.2 Call Park
Description
An extension user can hold a call by placing it into a common parking zone of the PBX. A parked call can
be retrieved by any extension user. This feature is useful when an extension user wants to hold more than
one intercom call with a proprietary telephone (PT), or more than one intercom call or outside (CO) line call
with a single line telephone (SLT).
Conditions
•
•
•
Call Park Recall
If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period ( Hold Recall Time [200]), a ring
tone will be heard at the extension that parked the call. If the destination is engaged in a call when the
timer expires, an alarm tone will be heard.
If a parked call is not retrieved within 30 minutes, it is automatically disconnected.
Retry
If the specified parking zone is occupied, the extension user will hear a busy tone. While hearing a busy
tone, the user can retry by selecting another parking zone.
User Manual References
1.4.2 Holding a Call
92
Feature Guide
1.12 Holding Features
1.12.3 Call Splitting
Description
An extension user can speak alternately with 2 parties. Placing the current call on hold allows the user to
speak with the other party.
Conditions
•
•
This feature does not apply to calls from doorphones or paging announcements.
Consultation Hold
When the extension user presses the HOLD button on a proprietary telephone (PT) or the Recall/
hookswitch on a single line telephone (SLT), the held party is automatically placed on consultation hold
( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold).
User Manual References
1.4.3 Talking to 2 Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
Feature Guide
93
1.12 Holding Features
1.12.4 Music on Hold
Description
An outside party on hold will hear audio to inform the party that the call is still on hold.
The following types of audio are available depending on the user's country/area:
a) Internal audio source
b) External audio source
c) Tone
The audio sources (internal and external) can also be used for BGM (
1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)).
Conditions
•
•
•
Hardware requirement: A user-supplied audio device, such as a CD player or radio for External audio
source.
The audio can be selected through system programming ( Music on Hold [111]).
Operations such as Call Hold ( 1.12.1 Call Hold) and Call Transfer ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer) activate
Music on Hold.
Installation Manual References
2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals
94
Feature Guide
1.12 Holding Features
1.12.5 Consultation Hold
Description
When an extension user is on a call and performs Call Transfer ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer), Call Splitting (
1.12.3 Call Splitting), or tries to establish a conference call ( 1.13.1.2 Conference), the call is
automatically placed on consultation hold. When the operation is completed or cancelled, the consultation
hold is released.
Feature Guide
95
1.13 Conference Features
1.13 Conference Features
1.13.1 Conference Features
1.13.1.1 Conference Features—OVERVIEW
Description
The following features are available to establish a conference call:
Feature
96
Description
Details in
Conference
An extension user can establish a 3-party or 5-party
conference call.
• 1.13.1.2
Conference
Executive Busy Override
An extension user can interrupt an existing call to
establish a 3-party conference call.
• 1.7.2 Executive
Busy Override
Feature Guide
1.13 Conference Features
1.13.1.2 Conference
Description
An extension user can establish a conference call. The following Conference features are available:
Feature
Description
3-party Conference
During a 2-party conversation, an extension user can add a third party to
the conversation, thereby establishing a 3-party conference call.
Unattended Conference:
The proprietary telephone (PT) user who originated a conference with 2
outside parties can leave the conference and allow the other parties to
continue the conversation. The user may return to the conference at any
time, if he or she desires.
5-party Conference
A PT user can establish a 3-party to 5-party conference call by entering
the 5-party Conference feature number.
Conditions
[General]
•
•
•
Conference call arrangement
The following configurations of 3-party or 5-party conference calls are possible at the same time
through system programming ( Conference Pattern [116]):
– 3-party conference calls between 3 extensions: Up to 3
– 3-party conference calls between one extension and 2 outside parties: Up to 4
– 3-party conference calls between 2 extensions and one outside party: Up to 4
– 5-party conference call with up to 3 extensions when using Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration,
with up to 4 extensions when not using Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration, or with a
combination of extensions and up to 2 outside parties: One
Conference Button
On a PT that does not have a CONF (Conference) button, a flexible CO button can be customised as
a Conference button.
Consultation Hold
When an extension user tries to establish a conference call, the current call is automatically placed on
consultation hold until the conference is established ( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold).
[3-party Conference]
•
•
A confirmation tone will be sent to all parties when a 2-party conference call is changed to a 3-party
conference call. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Conference Tone
[105]).
Unattended Conference Recall
The duration of unattended conferences is restricted by a system timer ( CO-to-CO Line Call
Duration [205]).
A ring tone or an alarm tone is heard at the conference originator's extension 50 seconds before the
timer expires.
A warning tone starts to be heard by parties in the unattended conference 15 seconds before the timer
expires.
If the originator returns to the conference before the unattended conference call is disconnected, the
Feature Guide
97
1.13 Conference Features
•
timer will be cancelled. If not, the ring tone or alarm tone and the warning tone will continue to be heard
until the unattended conference call is disconnected ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation).
An unattended conference cannot be established unless the extension is allowed to transfer a call to
an outside party through system programming ( Call Transfer to CO Line [606]).
[5-party Conference]
•
•
The following features will not function during a 5-party conference call:
– Call Hold
– Call Park
– Call Splitting
– Call Transfer
– Executive Busy Override
– Unattended Conference
A confirmation tone will be sent to all parties when a 5-party conference call is established and when
a 5-party conference call is changed to a 4-party conference call or vice versa. It is possible to eliminate
the tone through system programming ( Conference Tone [105]).
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
User Manual References
1.4.5 Talking to Multiple Parties (Conference)
98
Feature Guide
1.14 Paging Features
1.14 Paging Features
1.14.1 Paging
Description
An extension user can make a paging announcement to several people at once.
The announcement is heard through the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or an external
pager (loudspeaker), depending on the type of Paging that is performed as follows:
Type
Paging method
All Extensions
The page is heard through the built-in speakers of all PTs.
External
The page is heard through an external pager.
Group
The page is heard through the built-in speakers of the PTs that belong to
a certain extension group ( Extension Group [600]).
All Extensions & External
The page is heard through the built-in speakers of all PTs and an external
pager simultaneously.
The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone. It is possible to page with a call on hold
in order to transfer the call.
Paging Deny
It is possible for each extension to deny being paged.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied external pager.
A confirmation tone will be sent to the external pager before the paging announcement. It is possible
to eliminate the tone through system programming ( External Pager Access Tone [106]).
Only one person can use this feature at a time.
Extensions that cannot be paged are:
– Ringing or busy PTs
– PTs in Paging Deny mode
– PTs in DND mode ( 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND))
Installation Manual References
2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals
User Manual References
1.6.1 Paging
1.6.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement
Feature Guide
99
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15.1 Doorphone Call
Description
A visitor can use a doorphone to call its preprogrammed destination. Extension users can call a doorphone.
Doorphones can also be used for the Room Monitor feature ( 1.10.2 Room Monitor).
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hardware Requirement: An optional doorphone, and doorphone card.
A doorphone access tone will be sent to a monitored doorphone before monitoring starts. If an
extension user wants to monitor a doorphone without informing the other party, it is possible to eliminate
the tone through system programming ( Doorphone Access Tone [707]).
Ring Duration
If an incoming doorphone call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period ( Doorphone
Ring Time [708]), ringing stops and the call is cancelled.
An extension user can choose the preferred ring tone pattern for doorphone calls through system
programming ( Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]).
Call Destination
System programming determines the extensions that can receive calls from each doorphone for each
time service mode ( Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]).
Door Open
While on a doorphone call, an extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in ( 1.15.2 Door
Open).
When a doorphone call is received at a proprietary telephone (PT), a tone is heard instead of ringing.
Installation Manual References
2.3.3 2-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TE82460)
2.6 Connecting Doorphones and Door Openers
Feature Guide References
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
User Manual References
1.8.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
100
Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15.2 Door Open
Description
Using an extension telephone, an extension user can unlock a door for a visitor.
The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed through system programming to unlock the
door for each time service mode ( Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]). While on a doorphone call,
any extension user can unlock a door to let a visitor in ( 1.15.1 Doorphone Call).
Conditions
•
•
•
Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied door opener installed on each door, optional doorphone, and
doorphone card.
A door opener can unlock a door even if no doorphone is installed.
Door Open Duration
An opened door will remain unlocked for a preprogrammed length of time ( Door Open Duration
[709]).
Installation Manual References
2.3.3 2-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TE82460)
2.6 Connecting Doorphones and Door Openers
User Manual References
1.8.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
Feature Guide
101
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime
Description
Extension users can choose how their telephones receive doorphone calls, by selecting to hear ringing, a
chime, or both, provided a doorbell/door chime connected to a door opener is connected to the PBX. They
can recognise which doorphone is ringing by selecting a different doorphone chime pattern for each
doorphone.
[Programming Example]
In order for an extension connected to extension jack 01 (extension 101) to be able to receive a doorphone
call from a doorbell/door chime connected to Relay 2, programme as follows:
Programming
Doorphone
1
2
Doorphone Ringing*1
Enable (extn. 101)
Enable (extn. 101)
Doorphone Ring/Chime*2
Chime
Chime
Doorphone Chime Assignment*3
Relay 2
Relay 2
Doorphone Chime Pattern*4
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
*1
*2
*3
*4
Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]
Doorphone Ring/Chime [710]
Doorphone Chime Assignment [711]
Doorphone Chime Pattern [712]
In this example
When a visitor presses the Call button of Doorphone 2:
– A doorbell/door chime, connected to Relay 2, chimes with Pattern 2.
– Because Doorphone Ring/Chime is set to "Chime", extension 101 does not ring.
– The extension user who is allowed to receive a call from Doorphone 2 can answer the doorphone
call by going off-hook within a preprogrammed time period ( Doorphone Ring Time [708]). If the
user is allowed to unlock the door ( Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]), he or she can
then unlock the door by entering the Door Open feature number.
– If the called extension is busy and has set Call Waiting, the extension user hears a call waiting tone
and the call information flashes on the display.
Conditions
•
Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied doorbell/door chime connected to each door opener.
Installation Manual References
2.7 Connecting Doorbell or Door Chime
Feature Guide References
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
102
Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
User Manual References
1.8.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
Feature Guide
103
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can listen to background music (BGM) through the built-in speaker while
on-hook and idle.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external audio device, such as a CD player or radio for
External audio source.
The music heard through the PT is interrupted when going off-hook, receiving a call, or receiving a
paging announcement.
The audio can be selected through system programming ( Music on Hold [111]).
This feature can be turned on and off by dialling "1" while the extension is on-hook and idle, if BGM is
enabled through system programming ( BGM Control for APT [626]).
Installation Manual References
2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals
User Manual References
1.7.5 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)
104
Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD
Description
An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can record outgoing messages (OGMs) for
the following features:
Feature
Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
Usage
Details in
When a call arrives on a DISA line, the caller will hear • 1.15.6 Direct
a DISA OGM.
Inward System
Access (DISA)
3-level Automated Attendant When the DISA AA service is active, the caller will
• 1.15.6 Direct
(AA)
hear a DISA OGM. The DISA AA service supports up Inward System
to 3 levels of DISA OGMs.
Access (DISA)
Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD)
When a call arrives at a UCD group and all extensions • 1.2.2 Uniform
in the group are busy, the caller will hear a UCD OGM Call Distribution
( UCD Waiting Message [527]).
(UCD)
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
This feature functions differently from personal/common BV OGMs used by the BV feature ( 1.15.7
Built-in Voice Message (BV)).
To use this feature, "DISA" or "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside
(CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
The operator or manager can record a maximum of 32 messages (8 messages for DISA/UCD and 24
messages for 3-level AA).
After recording messages, the operator or manager can also play them back for confirmation. In
addition, the operator or manager can erase messages for DISA/UCD.
When the operator or manager tries to record or play back a message, he or she will hear an alarm
tone if the message channel is in use.
When a call between 2 outside parties is established or when Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO)
Line Type is being executed, the operator or manager cannot record or play back a message.
Prerecorded messages will not be cleared by a system restart. To clear them, use system programming
( Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]).
User Manual References
2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode
Feature Guide
105
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Description
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) allows outside callers to be connected to their desired PBX
destinations without the use of the operator. Callers can listen to a DISA outgoing message (OGM)
instructing them as to which numbers to dial to be connected to the person or department they would like
to speak with. DISA can also give PBX users access to PBX features, such as making outside (CO) line
calls, when they are outside the office.
This DISA OGM can guide callers and allow them to:
•
Call an extension by dialling the extension number.
•
Call another outside party via the outside (CO) lines of the PBX.
•
Access the desired extension simply by dialling a single-digit number (DISA Automated Attendant
[AA] number) using DISA AA service.
DISA OGM
When a call arrives on a DISA line, callers will hear a DISA OGM or a short beep. When the DISA AA service
is active, this DISA OGM will direct callers to dial the appropriate digit (DISA AA number) to be connected
to a specified destination. To access other PBX features, such as making intercom or outside (CO) line calls,
the caller may dial the appropriate numbers while the DISA OGM is playing.
An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can record a DISA OGM ( 1.15.5 Outgoing
Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD).
DISA AA Service
DISA AA service allows a caller to dial a single-digit number (DISA AA number) and be connected to the
desired party automatically. The PBX can store up to 10 destinations that can be called by dialling a DISA
AA number (0–9) for each DISA OGM ( DISA Built-in AA [501]). These destinations can be an extension
number ( Extension Number [009]), an extension group number ( Extension Group [600]), or the DISA
AA number of a 3-level DISA OGM ( 3-level AA Assignment [540-549]).
During or after the DISA OGM announcement ( DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]), or after a short beep
( Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]), the caller may dial a DISA AA number as directed by the DISA
OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Sales. Press 2 to speak to Support.").
Each DISA AA number directs the call to a preprogrammed location.
Since DISA AA numbers are single digits, if the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time
period ( DISA AA Wait Time [517]), DISA AA service will be bypassed because the PBX will assume the
caller is trying to access a specific feature.
When the DISA AA service is used, Incoming Dial Mode must be set to "With AA" through system
programming ( DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]). When "With AA" is selected, the PBX regards callerdialled digits "0" through "9" as DISA AA numbers. If no destination is assigned to "9" or "0", the PBX regards
the number (9/0)* as the Automatic Line Access number ( Automatic Line Access [121]) or Operator Call
number.
Note
*
106
For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.
Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
[Programming Example: 1-level (DISA) AA Table]
In order for a caller to be able to access Mike Smith (extension 102) using 1-level (DISA) AA, programme
as follows:
Distribution method*1
Outside (CO) Line No.
1
Day
Lunch
Night
DISA OGM1
DISA OGM1
DISA OGM1
Normal
Normal
Normal
2, 3
DISA AA No. for 1-level AA*2
*1
*2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
–
Mike
Smith
(102)
Extn.
103
Extn.
104
Extn.
105
Extn.
106
Extn.
107
Extn.
108
Extn.
Group 1
–
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
DISA Built-in AA [501]
[Programming Example: 3-level AA Table]
In order for a caller to be able to access Mike Smith of the Software Support Team (extension 102) using 3level AA, programme as follows:
Distribution method*1
Outside (CO) Line No.
1–3
Day
Lunch
Night
DISA OGM1
DISA OGM2
DISA OGM3
Feature Guide
107
1.15 Optional Device Features
1-level AA
DISA AA No.*2
0
–
1
2
3
Extn.
Extn.
2-level
Group 1 Group 2 AA*3
4
5
6
7
8
9
–
–
–
–
–
–
2-level AA
DISA AA No.*4
0
–
1
2
3
Extn.
3-level Extn.
Group 3 AA*5 Group 4
4
5
6
–
–
–
3-level AA
DISA AA No.*4
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Extn.
101
Mike
Smith
(102)*6
–
–
–
–
–
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
*1
2
DISA Built-in AA [501]
*
*3 2-level AA: Select "3-level AA" for AA number "3" in DISA Built-in AA [501]
3-level AA Assignment [540-549]
*4
5
* 3-level AA: Select "3-level AA" for "second AA number 2" and for "third AA number
in the [543] of 3-level AA Assignment [540-549]
*6 Mike Smith (102): Select "Jack 02" for "second AA number 2" and for "third AA
number 1" in the [543] of 3-level AA Assignment [540-549]
"
In this example:
1) After or while listening to the AA first-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Sales. Press 2 to
speak to Service. Press 3 to speak to Support."), caller dials a DISA AA number, "3", as directed
by the DISA OGM.
2) Next, the AA second-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Hardware Team. Press 2 to speak
to Software Team.") directs the caller to dial another DISA AA number. The caller dials "2".
3) Finally, the AA third-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Mike Smith. Press 0 to speak to
the Operator.") directs the caller to dial a DISA AA number, "1", to be connected to a specified
destination, extension 102.
Note
When the type of a destination from 2–level AA or 3–level AA to another setting is changed, any
associated DISA OGM will also be cleared. In addition, any items within the AA menu being removed
will also be removed.
108
Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
DISA Busy Mode
If the destination of a DISA call is busy, the call will be redirected to an idle extension ( Hunting Group Set
[100]) in the destination's idle extension hunting group ( 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting). If no extension in
the group is available, or if the destination of the DISA call is not a member of an idle extension hunting
group, the call will be handled in one of the following ways, according to system programming ( DISA Busy
Mode [506]):
a) Disconnect: The caller hears a busy tone and the call is disconnected.
b) Call Waiting: The called extension hears a call waiting tone if the extension has set Call Waiting.
c) DISA: The following procedure is performed:
1) If the assigned DISA OGM (busy message) has been recorded, the caller hears the DISA
OGM (e.g., "The party you called is unavailable..."). If the assigned DISA OGM has not been
recorded, the caller hears a busy tone and the call is disconnected.
2) After the busy message has been played, the DISA OGM that was sent before the busy
message is sent to the caller again.
3) The PBX waits for the caller to enter a new destination. In this case, the PBX does not accept
any Outside Line Access number regardless of the security type.
If the destination is a member of a DISA ring group, DISA Busy Mode will not function for the call. The PBX
regards it as unanswered.
DISA Intercept Mode
If the destination of a DISA call does not answer the call within a preprogrammed time period ( DISA Ring
Time before Intercept [508]), the call will be handled in one of the following ways, according to system
programming ( DISA Intercept Mode [507]):
a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected.
b) Intercept: The call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority:
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]
This is useful for business calls. For example, the call can be forwarded to the operator, a Voice
Processing System (VPS) or Built-in Voice Message (BV) automatically.
DISA No Dial Mode
If the PBX does not receive either DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) signals or a fax (CNG) tone within a
preprogrammed time period ( DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]), or if the PBX does not receive DTMF
signals within a preprogrammed time period ( Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]), the call will be
handled in one of the following ways, according to system programming ( DISA No Dial Mode [510]):
a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected.
b) Intercept: The call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority:
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]
DISA Security Mode
Security can be enabled for the PBX to control the types of calls that can be made by callers using DISA.
When the DISA security mode is set to "All Security" or "Trunk Security" ( DISA Security Mode [511]), a
caller is required to enter a DISA security code ( DISA Security Code [512]) before making intercom and
outside (CO) line calls, or outside (CO) line calls only, respectively. The DISA security code and the number
of digits required for the DISA security code ( DISA Security Code Digits [530]) can be assigned by the
manager. After entering a DISA security code, if the code is the same as one of the preprogrammed security
codes, the caller will hear a short beep. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming (
DISA Tone after Security Code [518]).
If the DISA security code is entered incorrectly 3 times when using DISA, a reorder tone will be sent to the
caller and the call will be disconnected.
Feature Guide
109
1.15 Optional Device Features
Security Mode
Intercom Calls
Outside (CO) Line Calls
All Security
Trunk Security
No Security
Permitted
Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Calls through DISA
DISA callers can use DISA to make outside (CO) line calls when allowed by the DISA security mode.
If a call between 2 outside parties is established via DISA, the length of the call can be limited to a
preprogrammed duration ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). A timer will activate when the call is
connected, and a warning tone will be heard 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer expires,
the call is disconnected ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation).
To detect the end of an outside-to-outside (CO-to-CO) line call, Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
can be assigned through system programming ( CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420], CPC Signal
Detection—Outgoing [421]).
110
Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
[Flowchart]
A DISA call from an outside
party is received.
(DISA Delayed Answer Time expires)
The PBX answers the call.
(DISA OGM Mute Time expires)
No
Yes
Is the assigned
DISA OGM recorded?
One short beep
DISA OGM
A
(Intercept Time for Internal DISA expires)
(DISA Wait Timer after OGM expires)
Fax (CNG) tone
Cyclic tone,
CPC signal
Nothing is dialled.
A number is dialled.
Yes
Is a security
code required?
What is the
security mode?
Trunk or No
No
The security
code is entered.
One
short beep
All
The call is
disconnected.
Busy tone
Is Intercept Routing
employed?
No
Yes
The code is correct.
Goes to C
Make an outside
(CO) line call.
The call is
disconnected.
The code is incorrect.
The call is
established.
Reorder tone
The call reaches the destination.
(DISA Ring Time before
Intercept expires)
The call is
established.
The call is sent to
the fax extension.
The call is
disconnected.
The call is not answered.
The destination
extension(s) is(are) busy.
Is Intercept Routing
employed?
What is the DISA
Busy Mode?
The call is not
answered for
40 seconds.
B
Yes
The call is
disconnected.
No
C
Call Waiting
Disconnect
DISA
Busy tone
Is DISA IRNA to BV
assigned?
No
Yes
BV is answered.
(DISA Ring Time
before Intercept expires)
The call is
disconnected.
The call is
established.
The call is sent to
another extension.
The call is not
answered.
A busy DISA
OGM is heard.
Goes to A
Goes to B
(DISA Ring Time after
Intercept expires)
The call is
established.
The call is not
answered.
The call is
disconnected.
Feature Guide
111
1.15 Optional Device Features
Conditions
WARNING
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO)
Line Call feature of DISA.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Enabling DISA security (Trunk Security or All Security).
•
•
The maximum recording time of each message is 3 minutes.
The preinstalled DISA/UCD OGM card can play only one message at a time and the total recording
time of the PBX for DISA/UCD OGMs is 3 minutes.
To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line
port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
DISA Delayed Answer Time
It is possible to set the DISA Delayed Answer time ( DISA Delayed Answer Time [504]) so that the
caller will hear a ringback tone for a preprogrammed length of time before hearing a DISA OGM or a
short beep.
Call Forwarding (FWD) to Outside (CO) Line
When a DISA call is forwarded to an outside party, the caller is not required to enter a DISA security
code regardless of the security mode.
DISA OGM Mute Time
Certain DTMF signals, such as Caller ID information, may be sent from the telephone company when
a call is first connected. Because these signals may interfere with DISA, the PBX can be programmed
to ignore DTMF signals for a specified amount of time ( OGM Mute Time [519]) after a call is
connected. After the DISA OGM Mute Time passes, DTMF signals are recognised by the PBX and the
DISA OGM begins playing or a short beep is sent.
SMDR
The following are logged by SMDR for DISA calls ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)):
– The destination of the DISA call
– DISA security code status
Call Deny
System programming determines which extensions can receive DISA calls ( DISA Incoming
Assignment [516]). If a DISA call is received at an extension that has Call Deny set, the caller will hear
a reorder tone and the call will be disconnected automatically. If a DISA call is received by a DISA ring
group, this programme does not function for extensions in that DISA ring group and these extensions
will still ring.
Cyclic Tone Detection
It is possible to select the number of times a cyclic tone must be detected while the DISA OGM is sent
( Cyclic Tone Detection [513]). Cyclic Tone Detection can be used to disconnect an outside-tooutside (CO-to-CO) line call via DISA.
Fax Connection
System programming determines the extensions that are able to receive fax data when the PBX
receives a fax (CNG) tone via the DISA feature ( FAX Connection [503]). The preprogrammed
extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set.
Fax Tone Detection
It is possible to select the number of times the fax (CNG) tone must be detected while the DISA OGM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
112
Maintaining the secrecy of passwords.
Selecting passwords that are complex and random, so that they cannot be easily guessed.
Changing passwords regularly.
Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
•
is sent before the PBX recognises the incoming signal as fax data ( FAX Tone Detection [514]). If the
DISA OGM is short (0–5 s), in some cases the fax (CNG) tone may not be detected. In this case, it is
recommended to set the length of time the PBX continues to search for a fax (CNG) tone after
completing a DISA OGM to "10 s" or "15 s" through system programming ( DISA Wait Time after
OGM [505]). If the assigned DISA OGM has not been recorded, it is recommended to set the length of
time to "6 s" or "9 s" through system programming ( Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]).
It is programmable whether a ringback tone ( Ringback Tone Pattern [128]) or Music on Hold (
Music on Hold [111]) is sent to the caller when a DISA call is received ( DISA Ringback Tone [531]).
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
User Manual References
1.2.7 Accessing Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access [DISA])
3.3.1 Programming Information
Feature Guide
113
1.15 Optional Device Features
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Description
If an optional voice message card is installed in the PBX, a caller can leave a voice message in a user's
personal message area or the PBX's common message area. Information on the recorded messages is
automatically logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension, where it can be viewed later or used to play
back the original message ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log).
The optional voice message card has 2 voice message resources (Built-in Voice Message [BV] resource 1
and BV resource 2), and every extension must belong to one of these resources based on system
programming ( BV Resource [621]).
Extension users other than the operator or manager can access the following options:
– Personal BV outgoing messages (OGMs)
– Personal voice messages (left by callers via Call Forwarding [FWD] or Direct Message)
Messages can be recorded, played, and erased by that extension's user.
The operator or manager can access the following options:
– Personal BV OGMs for the operator or manager
– Personal voice messages (left by callers via FWD or Direct Message for the operator or manager)
– Common BV OGMs for the company
– Common voice messages (left by callers for the company)
Messages can be recorded, played, and erased by the operator or manager only.
Up to 125 voice messages with a total recording time of 60 minutes ( BV Total Recording Time [807]) can
be logged per BV resource. All personal/common message areas within each BV resource share the total
space of the resource. For example, in BV resource 1, if the common message area currently has 10
messages, totalling 10 minutes, the personal and common message areas can jointly store up to 115
messages or 50 minutes.
114
Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
[Example: Pattern A]
BV Resource 1
BV Resource 2
Operator or Manager
(Extn. 101)
Extn. 102
Extn. 103
Common
Message Area
Personal
Message Area
Personal
Message Area
• Common BV OGM
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal BV OGM
• Common Voice
Message
• Personal Voice
Message
• Personal Voice
Message
Extn. 108
Personal
Message Area
Personal
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
• Personal Voice
Message
Total message recording time: 60 minutes max.
Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including
Common/Personal BV OGMs and Common/Personal Voice
Messages)
Total message recording time: 60 minutes max.
Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including
Personal BV OGMs and Personal Voice Messages)
[Example: Pattern B]
BV Resource 1
BV Resource 2
Operator or Manager
(Extn. 101)
Extn. 102
Common
Message Area
Personal
Message Area
• Common BV OGM
• Personal BV OGM
• Common Voice
Message
• Personal Voice
Message
Personal
Message Area
Extn. 108
Personal
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
• Personal Voice
Message
Total message recording time: 60 minutes max.
Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including
Common/Personal BV OGMs and Common/Personal Voice
Messages)
Total message recording time: 60 minutes max.
Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including
Personal BV OGMs and Personal Voice Messages)
Feature Guide
115
1.15 Optional Device Features
[Example: Pattern C]
BV Resource 1
BV Resource 2
Manager
(Extn. 101)
Operator
(Extn. 105)
Personal
Message Area
Common
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Common BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
• Common Voice
Message
Extn. 104
Personal
Message Area
Extn. 108
Personal
Message Area
Personal
Message Area
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal BV OGM
• Personal Voice
Message
• Personal Voice
Message
Total message recording time: 60 minutes max.
Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including
Personal BV OGMs and Personal Voice Messages)
Total message recording time: 60 minutes max.
Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including
Common/Personal BV OGMs and Common/Personal Voice
Messages)
If there are new voice messages in a user's personal message area or the common message area (if
accessible), the user will hear a special dial tone (dial tone 4) when going off-hook. In addition, if that user's
telephone has a MESSAGE button or Message/Ringer Lamp, the corresponding button or lamp will light
when a message has been left. A MESSAGE button can be used to listen to the message after the user
goes off-hook. Pressing the lit MESSAGE button on a display proprietary telephone (PT) while on-hook
shows voice message information.
The BV feature allows users to also perform the following operations:
•
If outside (CO) line calls are preprogrammed to be automatically directed to a common message
area ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]), or if Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
calls are preprogrammed to be redirected to a common message area via Intercept Routing (
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]), the caller will hear a common BV OGM and can
leave a voice message directly in the common message area.
[Programming Example]
Outside (CO)
Line No.
*1
116
Feature Guide
Distribution method*1
Day
Night
Lunch
1
BV01*3
BV02*3
BV02*3
2
DISA
OGM3
DISA
OGM4
Normal
3
Normal
Normal
Normal
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
DISA IRNA to BV*2
Day
Night
Lunch
Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored
BV20*3
BV21*3
Not Stored
Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored
1.15 Optional Device Features
*2
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
Note
This feature functions only when "DISA" is selected as the distribution
method for the corresponding outside (CO) line port.
*3 BVxx (xx=01–24): Common BV OGM number followed by the Common BV OGM
feature number "722"
In this example:
If an outside (CO) line call is received on outside (CO) line 1:
a) In day mode: The common BV OGM to be played ("BV01") for BV distribution is assigned.
The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the
common message area.
b) In night/lunch mode: The common BV OGM to be played ("BV02") for BV distribution is
assigned. The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message
in the common message area.
If an outside (CO) line call is received on outside (CO) line 2:
a) In day mode: The DISA OGM to be played ("DISA OGM3") for DISA distribution and the
common BV OGM to be played ("BV20") for DISA IRNA to BV are assigned. The call
arrives on a DISA line and the caller hears the specified DISA OGM. When the destination
does not answer the DISA call, the call is redirected to the common message area via
Intercept Routing. The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice
message in the common message area.
b) In night mode: The DISA OGM to be played ("DISA OGM4") for DISA distribution and the
•
•
•
common BV OGM to be played ("BV21") for DISA IRNA to BV are assigned. The call
arrives on a DISA line and the caller hears the specified DISA OGM. When the destination
does not answer the DISA call, the call is redirected to the common message area via
Intercept Routing. The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice
message in the common message area.
An extension user can set incoming calls to be forwarded to his or her personal message area,
when he or she cannot answer them. If an incoming call, direct to the user's extension, or a call
using the DISA AA service ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]), is forwarded to the
user's personal message area, the caller will hear a personal BV OGM and can leave a voice
message.
Direct Message feature
An extension user can leave a voice message directly in the personal message area of another
extension, even if the extension has not been set to forward incoming calls to its personal message
area, or even if no personal/common BV OGM has been recorded. When a caller leaves a voice
message using this feature, the voice message is automatically linked to the caller information
(including the extension number and name [if stored]) in the Incoming Call Log.
An extension user can play and/or erase voice messages from the user's extension. In addition, a
user or the operator/manager can remotely play and/or erase voice messages through an outside
(CO) line. The relevant voice message area is accessed by entering a preprogrammed voice
message access code ( BV Access Code through CO Line [625]) while hearing a personal/
common BV OGM or DISA OGM.
Note
If the Voice Mail Integration feature has been set, the BV feature will not function.
Feature Guide
117
1.15 Optional Device Features
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
118
Hardware Requirement: An optional voice message card.
The BV feature does not use OGMs for DISA/Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) on the preinstalled DISA/
UCD OGM card ( 1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD).
When an extension that belongs to BV resource 1 or BV resource 2 is reassigned to the other resource,
the voice messages that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased, but the personal/common BV
OGMs are not erased.
Each resource can only be accessed by one extension at a time. When the resource an extension is
assigned to is being used by another extension, the extension cannot use that resource, even if the
other resource is available.
The PBX can record a maximum of 125 voice messages per resource. The maximum recording time
of each voice message ( BV Recording Time [214]) and the total recording time of the PBX ( BV
Total Recording Time [807]) are programmable. The maximum recording time of each personal/
common BV OGM ( Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215]) is also programmable.
System programming determines the extension users that can use this feature ( BV for Extension
[622]).
If a voice message channel (resource) is in use when an outside caller tries to leave a voice message,
he or she will hear a ringback tone. The caller will hear a personal/common BV OGM as soon as a
channel becomes available. Up to 3 outside (CO) line calls can be placed in a queue as they arrive.
If a user performs System Data Clear by selecting "All para" through system programming ( System
Data Clear [999]), all voice messages except for personal/common BV OGMs are erased. To erase all
voice messages and personal/common BV OGMs at once, initialise the voice message card through
system programming ( BV Card Initialisation [808]).
Even if no flexible CO button is assigned as a Caller ID Indication—Personal button or a Caller ID
Indication—Common button, a caller can leave a voice message in that personal/common message
area and the Caller ID information, including associated voice messages will be logged.
When the remaining recording time for the PBX is less than 5 minutes, the display informs both the
extension users within the same resource and the manager that the voice message resource is full, and
the users will hear a special dial tone (dial tone 5) when going off-hook. If the remaining recording time
goes back to being 5 minutes or more, for example, when messages are erased, the display returns to
the idle status display and the users will hear another dial tone instead of dial tone 5 when going offhook.
If the FWD feature is enabled for an extension whose FWD destination is the BV feature number (
Call Forwarding Selection [963]) and the extension has been assigned as "Normal" ( CO Line
Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]), outside (CO) line calls to the extension will not be forwarded and
the extension will not ring, even if the user has set the FWD feature. If FWD is disabled, outside (CO)
line calls to the extension will not be forwarded and the extension will ring.
Only the operator or the manager can access the common message area (including common BV
OGM). The operator has higher priority than the manager as follows:
– When the operator extension is reassigned, the common voice messages (except for the personal
BV OGM of the operator) that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased. The new operator
can record, play back, and erase the common BV OGM.
– When the operator, who does not share an extension number with the manager, is newly assigned,
the common voice messages (except for the personal BV OGM of the manager) that were recorded
prior to reassignment are erased. The operator can record, play back, and erase the common BV
OGM.
– When the operator, who does not share an extension number with the manager, is deleted, the
common voice messages (except for the personal BV OGM of the operator) that were recorded
prior to reassignment are erased. In this case, the manager can record, play back, and erase the
common BV OGM.
Feature Guide
1.15 Optional Device Features
•
•
•
•
A voice message area cannot be included as a member of a conference call.
Even if a caller does not leave a voice message in either the personal or common message area, for
example, by going on-hook while hearing a personal/common BV OGM, the information is still logged
in the corresponding Incoming Call Log (common or personal area) and displayed by SMDR ( 1.20.1
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).
Personal/Common BV OGM Mute Time
Certain DTMF signals, such as Caller ID information, may be sent from the telephone company when
a call is first connected. Because these signals may interfere with BV, the PBX can be programmed to
ignore DTMF signals for a specified amount of time ( OGM Mute Time [519]) after a call is connected.
After the Personal/Common BV OGM Mute Time passes, DTMF signals are recognised by the PBX
and the personal/common BV OGM begins playing.
A PT user can listen to voice messages by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature number.
Installation Manual References
2.3.4 2-Channel Voice Message Card (KX-TE82492)
Feature Guide References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
User Manual References
1.5.5 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Voice Message [BV])
2.1.6 Recording, Playing, or Erasing Common BV Outgoing Messages
Feature Guide
119
1.16 Caller ID Features
1.16 Caller ID Features
1.16.1 Caller ID
Description
The PBX can receive Caller ID information (telephone numbers and callers' names) from calls received on
outside (CO) lines. This information can be shown on the displays of proprietary telephones (PTs) as well
as some single line telephones (SLTs) when receiving calls. Additionally, Caller ID information is logged in
the Incoming Call Log of the extension that received the call, allowing the caller to view a record of incoming
calls or make a call to a person in the call log later.
The PBX can be programmed to modify a caller's telephone number when it is received by, for example,
adding an Outside (CO) Line Access number or adding/deleting certain digits of incoming telephone
numbers automatically. This allows an extension user to make a call later to a telephone number logged in
his or her call log without worrying about Outside (CO) Line Access numbers, area codes, etc.
Notes
•
•
•
The term "Caller ID" used in this Feature Guide refers to features that can receive caller information
sent from the telephone company and received on outside (CO) lines. Your network provider may
use a different name for this type of service.
To receive Caller ID information, you must subscribe to the telephone company's Caller ID service
and enable Caller ID for the appropriate outside (CO) lines through system programming ( Caller
ID [900]).
Caller ID signalling type, FSK (Bell 202 or V.23) or DTMF, can be selected to match the type used
by your telephone company through system programming ( Caller ID Type [910]).
Caller ID Display on SLT
This feature is available only for SLTs compatible with either FSK-type Caller ID or DTMF (Dual Tone MultiFrequency)-type Caller ID.
Notes
•
•
This feature complies with ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute)-type FSK
and Bellcore-type FSK.
This feature does not comply with methods using DT-AS signal or line reversal signal.
1. Caller ID-Related Feature
Feature
Incoming Call Log
Description
Details in
Caller ID information is automatically recorded in • 1.16.2 Incoming
the call log of the extension that received the call. Call Log
This information can be used to view a record of
incoming calls or make calls to any number in the
call log.
2. Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition
When a call containing Caller ID information is received, the PBX can add "0"*1 to the caller's telephone
number as a leading number if it does not begin with "0", through system programming ( Caller ID
Automatic 0 Addition [905]).
*1
For New Zealand, "0" can be added to the received telephone number when the maximum length of a telephone number is 8 or 9 digits,
and "00" can be added to the received telephone number when the maximum length is 10 digits or more.
120
Feature Guide
1.16 Caller ID Features
3. Automatic Caller ID Number Modification
When Caller ID information is checked, the PBX can automatically modify the caller's telephone number
according to a preprogrammed set of rules (Caller ID Modification Table). This modified number allows
the extension user to make a call to this number later without worrying about Outside (CO) Line Access
numbers, area codes, etc.
[Programming Example: Caller ID Modification Table]
Call Type
Local Call*2
Code No.
Area Code*1
Removed No. of
Digits
Added No.
1
212
3
Not Stored
2
011
3
001
:
:
:
:
[Not programmable]
0
1
5
Long-distance Call*3
*1
*2
*3
Caller ID Area Code [901]
Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902]
Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903]
Feature Guide
121
1.16 Caller ID Features
<Modification Flowchart>
An outside (CO) line call containing
Caller ID information is received.
Yes
No
Is the caller's area code stored in
the Caller ID Modification Table?
Modifies the number according to the
method programmed in the corresponding
"Local Call" field.
Modifies the number according to the
method programmed in the "Long-distance
Call" field.
Example:
Removed number of digits: 3
Added number: blank
Example:
Removed number of digits: 0
Added number: 1
Example:
Received number: 201 555 1234
Example:
Received number: 313 555 1234
Modified number:
Modified number:
555 1234
Modification is complete.
Modified number is logged.
1 313 555 1234
Modification is complete.
Modified number is logged.
4. Displaying the Caller's Name
When a call containing Caller ID information is received, the PBX will search for the caller's name in the
following order, then show that name on the display.
1) The System Speed Dialling Table
2) The Caller ID information received from the telephone company
If a caller's name is not stored in the PBX or sent from the telephone company, it will not be displayed.
Conditions
[General]
•
Hardware Requirement: An optional Caller ID card.
[Caller ID Display on SLT]
•
122
Caller ID Display on SLT feature applies to:
Intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls.
Intercom calls include forwarded calls, calls from Transfer Recall and Hold Recall.
Outside (CO) line calls include calls directed to Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) or Direct Inward System
Feature Guide
1.16 Caller ID Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Access (DISA) ring groups, forwarded calls, intercepted calls, or calls from extensions that placed
outside (CO) line calls on consultation hold.
SLT Caller ID signalling type can be selected through system programming ( SLT Caller ID Signalling
Type [150]).
Each SLT (including an SLT connected in parallel with a PT) can be programmed to receive Caller ID
information through system programming ( SLT Caller ID [628]).
When the caller's telephone number is sent to an SLT, an Outside (CO) Line Access number can be
automatically added to the telephone number through system programming ( SLT Caller ID Line
Access Number [151]), to be used when calling the caller back.
If a call is transferred, forwarded, or intercepted via Intercept Routing to an SLT, the original caller's
information will be shown on the SLT.
During a conversation, Caller ID information will not be shown on the SLT.
When FSK-type Caller ID information is received, the caller's telephone number (max. 20 digits), name
(max. 16 characters), date and time, or the reason for nondisplay of Caller ID information such as
"Private", "Out of Area", or "Long Distance" will be shown on the SLT. If the caller's telephone number
exceeds 20 digits, the SLT receives only the first 20 digits. If the caller's name exceeds 16 characters,
the SLT receives only the first 16 characters.
When DTMF-type Caller ID information is received, the caller's telephone number (max. 16 digits) or
the reason for nondisplay of Caller ID information will be shown on the SLT. If the caller's telephone
number exceeds 16 digits, the SLT receives only the first 16 digits. However, when a value less than
"1500 ms" is set through system programming ( SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]), the SLT receives only
the first 10 digits.
Depending on the type of SLT being used, caller names and the dates and times that calls were
received may not be able to be shown on the SLT.
If an outside caller disconnects a call to an SLT on which the call's Caller ID information is displayed,
and the SLT receives another outside (CO) line call directly after, the SLT will wait until a
preprogrammed time has passed ( SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]) before it starts to ring,
and the new caller's Caller ID information will be shown on the SLT. A certain amount of time may be
required between calls for an SLT to receive Caller ID information correctly.
To enable the Caller ID feature, it may be necessary to set the same ring tone pattern ( SLT Fixed
Bell Pattern [629]) as used by the telephone company.
When an SLT is programmed to receive Caller ID information, the ringing of calls with Caller ID on that
SLT is delayed for a few seconds. Therefore, the length of time before calls are forwarded or intercepted,
and the length of time that intercepted calls ring at the destination SLT, may be slightly shorter than the
duration specified through system programming.
Installation Manual References
2.3.2 3-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TE82493)
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
Feature Guide
123
1.16 Caller ID Features
1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
Description
When a call containing Caller ID information is received by an extension, the information is shown on the
telephone display, notifying the extension user of the caller's identity.
This information is also automatically logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension, and can be viewed
later or used to call that caller back.
There are 2 types of call log areas available in the PBX. One is the personal area, which stores logs of calls
received by each extension when a call arrives at a certain proprietary telephone (PT).
The other is the common area, which stores a log of calls arriving at multiple PTs or via the Direct Inward
System Access (DISA) Intercept Routing feature. Caller ID information can be logged by the following
methods:
•
Logged automatically when no one answers calls.
•
Logged automatically if an extension user presets logging of the caller's information when
answering calls.
•
Logged manually by pressing the Caller ID Indication button during a conversation.
•
Logged automatically when a caller leaves a voice message ( 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message
(BV))
[Example]
If the information is stored in record "002",
002:JOHN WHITE
--- Caller's name
002: 0011223344
--- Caller's number
002: May15 10:23A --- Date and time of call
New:002 Old:001 --- Status* & number of logged calls
Caller ID Selection buttons
Caller ID Indication buttons
Personal
Personal
Common
Common
* "New" is displayed for call records that have not previously been viewed;
"Old" is displayed for call records that have previously been viewed.
Both new and old call records are stored in each personal and common area.
Conditions
•
Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common Button
A flexible CO button can be customised as a Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button, and will
indicate the status of the Incoming Call Log for the extension, as shown below.
Light pattern
124
Status of the corresponding call log
Red on
There are new call records since the last time the call log was viewed.
Off
There are no new call records in the call log, or the call log has been
already viewed.
Feature Guide
1.16 Caller ID Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button will alert an extension user to any missed
(unanswered) calls.
The Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button is also used to store the information of an incoming
call during a conversation, and to view caller information while on-hook and then call back a caller.
If a Caller ID Indication—Common button is not assigned to any PT, the calls will be logged in the
personal area of the PT that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack, and its Caller ID Indication—
Personal button light will turn red.
Caller ID Selection—Personal/Common Button
A flexible CO button can be customised as a Caller ID Selection—Personal/Common button. The Caller
ID Selection—Personal/Common button is used to display the number of logged calls while on-hook,
to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a conversation, while receiving
a call, or while viewing caller information, and to inform an extension user that the personal or common
area call log is full. The user may also change the displayed information by pressing the "#" key instead
of the Caller ID Selection—Personal/Common button while receiving a call, or while viewing caller
information.
It is programmable whether the user can view call logs stored in the common area or not ( Common
Area Call Log Check [909]). If this programme is enabled, the Caller ID Indication—Common button
and Caller ID Selection—Common button can be assigned.
Incoming Call Log Memory
The total number of incoming calls that can be logged by the PBX is limited ( 4.1.1 Capacity of
System Resources). When a call log is full (personal area: 20 calls, common area: 300 calls), the Caller
ID Selection—Personal/Common button light will turn red. When a caller leaves a voice message, it is
automatically linked to the Caller ID information in the Incoming Call Log. Up to 125 voice messages
per BV resource are stored separately from the Incoming Call Logs mentioned above.
It is possible for an extension user (or the operator/manager) to select whether the oldest call in the
personal area (or common area) will be replaced each time a call is received, or whether the new call
information will be discarded, by entering the 21st Incoming Call Logged in the Personal Area (or 301st
Incoming Call Logged in the Common Area) feature number.
Caller records for all call logs of an extension are numbered sequentially as they are received,
regardless of which call log the information is stored in. For example, information on the first call
received will be stored as record "001" (e.g., 001, logged in the personal area) and information on the
second call received will be stored as record "002" (e.g., 002, logged in the common area), whether it
is logged in the personal area, common area, or BV.
If the call log in the personal area becomes full when the 21st call (e.g., 110, logged in the personal
area) has been set to overwrite the oldest call (001, logged in the personal area),
– The oldest call will be deleted and subsequent records will be moved one number down, if the 21st
call is unanswered or if it is answered but has different information from the 20th call.
– The 21st call will be discarded and the previous call information will stay as it is, if the 21st call is
answered and has the same information as the 20th call.
Common area call logs function in the same way.
If a transferred call (unscreened) is not answered, the information is logged in the personal area of the
final destination.
Regardless of the telephone type being used, the recorded voice message is associated with the
caller's information.
Even if no flexible CO button is assigned as a Caller ID Indication—Personal button or a Caller ID
Indication—Common button, a caller can leave a voice message in that personal/common message
area and the Caller ID information, including associated voice messages will be logged.
Incoming Call Log Display Lock
An extension user can lock the Incoming Call Log (including associated voice messages) stored in his
or her personal area, preventing other users from viewing its contents ( 1.8.3 Extension Lock). The
operator or manager can cancel the lock in the case that the extension user forgets the lock code
Feature Guide
125
1.16 Caller ID Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
(Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL).
The Incoming Call Log for the common area can only be locked or unlocked by the operator or manager.
Automatic Caller ID Number Modification
If the PBX is programmed to automatically modify incoming telephone numbers, the modified numbers
will be displayed when Caller ID information is checked. Extension users can also modify the incoming
telephone numbers manually.
Initial Display Selection
If the Caller ID service provides both the number and name, the user can select which is shown first on
the display of the PT through system programming ( Caller ID Log Priority [904]).
While a user is viewing his or her extension's Incoming Call Log, if the caller whose information is being
viewed also left a voice message, the Message/Ringer Lamp or the MESSAGE button light will turn on.
The associated voice messages in that personal/common message area can be played or erased with
the MESSAGE button or the TRANSFER button respectively.
Even if there are message waiting indications left at a user's extension, the Message/Ringer Lamp or
the MESSAGE button light that displays notifications from the Message Waiting feature ( 1.17.1
Message Waiting) turns off while the user is viewing his or her extension's Incoming Call Log with the
Caller ID Indication—Personal/Common button.
If a user erases voice messages by any method (for example, by using BV or performing System Data
Clear), the caller's information is erased from the extension's Incoming Call Log simultaneously.
Even if a caller does not leave a voice message, for example, by going on-hook while hearing a
personal/common BV outgoing message (OGM), the information is logged in the corresponding
Incoming Call Log (common or personal area).
During a conversation with an extension or outside party, an extension user can transfer the call to
another extension that has set incoming calls to be forwarded to that extension's personal message
area, or can transfer the call to the personal message area using the Direct Message feature of BV. If
the transferring user performs Call Transfer with Announcement, there is a chance that both parties may
be recorded in the same message. In this case, the information of the last extension or outside party
that recorded the message is logged in the corresponding Incoming Call Log (personal area).
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Caller ID
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
User Manual References
1.9.1 Calling with the Incoming Call Log
2.1.4 Erasing All Caller Information in the Common Area (Incoming Call Log in the Common Area—CLEAR
ALL)
2.1.5 Disregarding the Newest Call or Overwriting the Oldest Call in the Common Area Call Log (301st
Incoming Call Logged in the Common Area)
126
Feature Guide
1.17 Message Features
1.17 Message Features
1.17.1 Message Waiting
Description
When an extension user calls another extension user who does not answer the call, he or she can leave a
message waiting indication. The appropriate button or lamp on the called extension user's telephone will
light, indicating that a call was missed, or a message recorded by the Voice Processing System (VPS) or
Built-in Voice Message (BV) feature is waiting. A MESSAGE button can be used to call the caller back or
listen to the message.
When a message is left for a proprietary telephone (PT), the MESSAGE button on it lights, or the Message/
Ringer Lamp turns red. Pressing the lit MESSAGE button while on-hook shows the caller's information as
shown below:
[Example]
105:Tom Smith
--- Extension no. and name of the person who left the message
Message/Message for another
extension buttons
This extension
Other extension*
* This button is useful when, for example, the manager checks messages left for another
extension.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
System programming determines the single line telephones (SLTs) that can receive the message
waiting notifications left by another extension ( SLT Message Waiting [619]).
If a user goes off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be
heard. The user can call a caller back or listen to the message by entering the Message Waiting Answer
feature number.
Message for another extension Button
A flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS) button can be customised as a Message for another
extension button. This button can be used on a PT that is allowed through system programming (
Message Waiting for Another Extension [618]) to access messages left for another extension or voice
messages stored in another extension's VPS mailbox.
Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock
An extension user can lock or unlock message waiting indications to prevent others from viewing,
calling back or clearing message waiting indications left at his or her extension. The operator and
manager can override this lock to unlock it (Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL).
Even while this lock is on, the user can view, call back, or clear message waiting indications left at his
or her own extension.
Both the calling extension and the called extension can cancel a notification after it has been left.
Feature Guide
127
1.17 Message Features
•
•
•
•
•
Message waiting indications are always left on the originally called extension. Message waiting
indications cannot be sent to an FWD destination ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)) or an idle
extension hunting destination ( 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting).
A message waiting indication is automatically cleared when the called extension calls the caller back
and the call is answered.
Message Waiting Indication via Voice Mail APT Integration
If a voice message is left for the called extension, it can be heard by following the Voice Mail prompts
after pressing the lit MESSAGE button ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration).
Message Waiting Indication via BV
If a voice message is left in the user's personal message area or the common message area, it can be
played back with the lit MESSAGE button by the user or the operator/manager respectively ( 1.15.7
Built-in Voice Message (BV)).
It is possible to activate the Message/Ringer Lamp ( KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968])
on the KX-T7700 series telephones for the following incoming calls:
– Incoming call from another extension to a busy extension when the called extension has set Call
Waiting (Call Waiting Tone 1)
– Incoming doorphone call whose ring tone pattern is set to "S-Double" ( Doorphone Ring Tone
Pattern [706]) (except when using the Parallelled Telephone feature) when an optional doorphone
or doorbell/door chime is connected to the PBX
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
User Manual References
1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
1.5.5 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Voice Message [BV])
1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
128
Feature Guide
1.17 Message Features
1.17.2 Absent Message
Description
Extension users can prepare a brief text message (Absent Message) that will be displayed to other
extension users when they are called. This message can explain the reason for their absence, and can be
used by any extension user.
The following Absent Messages may be programmed:
Message No.
Notes
•
•
Message
1
Will Return Soon
2
Gone Home
3
At Ext %%% (Extension Number)
4
Back at %%:%% (Hour:Minute) AM (or PM)
5
Out Until %%/%% (Month/Day)*
6
In a Meeting
* The date order varies depending on the user's country/area.
The "%" shown above indicates a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an
individual extension.
Conditions
•
•
An extension user can select only one Absent Message at a time. The selected message is displayed
at the extension every time the user goes off-hook.
The caller must be using a display proprietary telephone (PT) to see the Absent Message.
User Manual References
1.5.2 Showing a Message on the Caller's Telephone Display (Absent Message)
Feature Guide
129
1.17 Message Features
1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support
Description
When outside (CO) line calls are received from a Short Message Service (SMS) centre, the PBX can route
incoming calls to specific single line telephones (SLTs) that support SMS according to a preprogrammed
set of rules (SMS Routing Table). Fixed Line SMS is a service that allows text messages to be sent and
received via Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) access.
If a user subscribes to his or her telephone company's Caller ID service and the PBX receives an SMS
centre call from the registered SMS centre number, the PBX will relay the text message to the SLT. In all
other cases, incoming outside (CO) line calls will be directed according to system programming ( CO Line
Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
To make or receive SMS centre calls using fixed lines, the PBX and specific SLTs must be programmed so
they will know how to handle those calls. To programme SLTs, refer to the Operating Instructions supplied
with the SLTs.
Notes
•
•
This feature complies with the following ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute)
specifications:
ETSI ES 201 912
This feature is available only for SLTs that support SMS. SMS service depends on the contract with
your telephone company.
[Programming Example: SMS Routing Table with Sub-address Numbers]
When the SMS centre number used to receive SMS centre calls is "1112224444" and the telephone
numbers of each outside (CO) line are "3847001" for CO 1/2 and "3847002" for CO 3, programme as
follows:
1) PBX setting
SMS Centre Number for Receiving*1: 1112224444
Location No.
*1
*2
*3
Outside (CO) Line No.*2
Extension Jack No.*3
1
CO 1, CO 2
Jack 01, Jack 02, Jack 03
2
CO 3
Jack 07, Jack 08
3
Not Stored
Not Stored
SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145]
SMS Routing Table—CO [146]
SMS Routing Table—Extension [147]
If the SMS centre supports sub-address numbers, up to 4 SLTs can be assigned as the SMS
destinations for a single location. One location can be used for each outside (CO) line telephone
number.
130
Feature Guide
1.17 Message Features
2) SLT setting
Extension Jack No.
SMS Centre Number for SMS Centre Number for
Sending
Receiving
SMS Subaddress
Jack 01
89*1 P*21112223333
1112224444
1
Jack 02
89*1 P*21112223333
1112224444
2
Jack 07
89*1 P*21112223333
1112224444
1
(Cont.) :
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
*1 89: Outside (CO) Line Access number used to make SMS centre calls using the fixed outside (CO)
lines.
When the SMS centre can receive an SMS message from any telephone number, the Automatic
Line Access number or Outside (CO) Line Access number can also be used respectively.
2
* P: Pause
In this example:
a) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 01, enter "38470011" as
the destination.
b) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 02, enter "38470012" as
the destination.
c) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 07, enter "38470021" as
the destination.
[Programming Example: SMS Routing Table without Sub-address Numbers]
When the SMS centre number used to receive SMS centre calls is "1112224444" and the telephone
numbers of each outside (CO) line are "3847001" for CO 1, "3847002" for CO 2, and "3847003" for CO 3,
programme as follows:
1) PBX setting
SMS Centre Number for Receiving: 1112224444
Location No.
Outside (CO) Line No.
Extension Jack No.
1
CO 1
Jack 01
2
CO 2
Jack 02
3
CO 3
Jack 03
If the SMS centre does not support sub-address numbers, only one SLT can be assigned for each
location.
One location can be used for each outside (CO) line telephone number.
Feature Guide
131
1.17 Message Features
2) SLT setting
Extension Jack No.
SMS Centre Number for SMS Centre Number for
Sending
Receiving
SMS Subaddress
Jack 01
89 P1112223333
1112224444
–
Jack 02
89 P1112223333
1112224444
–
Jack 03
89 P1112223333
1112224444
–
(Cont.) :
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
In this example:
a) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 01, enter "3847001" as the
destination.
b) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 02, enter "3847002" as the
destination.
c) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 03, enter "3847003" as the
destination.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
132
Hardware Requirement: An optional Caller ID card.
The PBX relays text messages from the SMS centre to SMS-enabled SLTs, and vice versa.
To receive SMS information, you must subscribe to the telephone company's Caller ID service and
enable Caller ID for the appropriate outside (CO) lines through system programming ( Caller ID
[900]).
Each SMS-enabled SLT must be programmed to receive Caller ID information through system
programming ( SLT Caller ID [628]).
If an SLT user sets the Automatic Callback Busy feature by dialling "6" because the selected line is busy
when he or she tries to send a text message, the SLT will ring when the line becomes idle. To send the
text message, the user must answer the callback ring, go on-hook, and then make an SMS centre call
again.
When a call is received on one of the outside (CO) lines preprogrammed in an SMS Routing Table, the
destination SLT may ring one time.
If a user wants to receive SMS messages on an SLT, it is recommended to not connect a proprietary
telephone (PT) in parallel. If the PT user answers the call, the SMS message will not be received.
When an SMS centre call is received at an SLT that has set the Call Forwarding (FWD) feature, the
FWD feature will not function and the SMS message is received by that SLT.
When an SLT user makes an SMS centre call, in some cases the duration of the call may not be verified
with SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)), because it takes very little time to
send SMS messages. To verify the duration of these calls, it is recommended to set the start timer of
call duration to "5 s" or "Instantly" through system programming ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]).
When a user on an SLT that is in "TONE (DTMF)" mode makes an SMS call using outside (CO) lines
set to "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode through system programming ( Dial Mode [401]), if the SMS
centre number is longer than supported, for example 16 digits, the SMS call may not be completed. In
this case, set the dialling mode of the SLT to "PULSE" mode using the switch.
Feature Guide
1.17 Message Features
Installation Manual References
2.3.2 3-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TE82493)
Feature Guide
133
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
Description
Proprietary telephones (PTs) and Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles feature a wide variety of feature
buttons and Line Access buttons, explained below.
Note that certain models do not have certain buttons.
For a description of the buttons found on each PT or DSS Console, please refer to the Operating Instructions
for each PT or DSS Console.
[PT]
Button
134
Function
Navigator Key
Used to adjust the volume of the speaker, handset and headset, and the display
contrast, or to select desired items.
Volume Key
Used to adjust the volume of the speaker, handset and headset.
PROGRAM
Used to enter and exit programming mode.
FLASH/RECALL
Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up
(Flash/Recall mode), or to send an EFA (External Feature Access) signal to the
telephone company or host PBX to access external features (EFA mode).
HOLD
Used to place a call on hold.
SP-PHONE
(Speakerphone)
Used to select handset or hands-free operation.
MONITOR
Used to select hands-free dialling and monitor operation.
MESSAGE
Used to leave a message waiting indication, call back the party who left a
message waiting indication, or play back voice messages. This button is
provided with an LED (Light Emitting Diode), except for on KX-T7700 series
telephones. With KX-T7700 series telephones, the Message/Ringer Lamp is lit
when a message waiting indication is left at an extension.
REDIAL
Used to redial the last number dialled.
TRANSFER
Used to transfer a call to another party.
Flexible CO
Used to access an outside (CO) line (or outside (CO) line group) when making
or receiving a call. The button's preprogrammed Outside (CO) Line Access
method determines which line is selected (Default: Single-CO [S-CO]). Can also
be customised as a feature button.
INTERCOM
Used to make or receive intercom calls.
AUTO ANS (Auto
Answer)/MUTE
Used to answer an intercom call automatically in hands-free mode, or to mute
the built-in microphone during a conversation.
VOICE CALL
Used to answer an intercom call automatically.
Feature Guide
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
Button
Function
AUTO DIAL/STORE
Used for System Speed Dialling/Saved Number Redial, playing back personal/
common BV outgoing messages (OGMs) used by the Built-in Voice Message
(BV) feature, and storing programme changes.
CONF (Conference)
Used to establish a 3-party or 5-party conference call.
FWD/DND (Call
Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb)
Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension.
PAUSE
Used to insert a dialling pause in a stored number.
PF (Programmable
Feature)
Used to access a preprogrammed feature (no default). Mostly used as a Onetouch Dialling button.
[DSS Console]
Button
Usage
Flexible DSS
Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation. Each button is
programmed to correspond to an extension. DSS buttons can also be
customised as different feature buttons.
PF
Used to access a preprogrammed feature (no default). Mostly used as a Onetouch Dialling button.
Conditions
•
Certain buttons are equipped with a light to indicate the status of the corresponding line or feature.
User Manual References
1.1.1 Before Operating a Telephone
Feature Guide
135
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
Description
Flexible buttons are buttons whose functions can be customised through either system or personal
programming. The following types of flexible buttons are found on proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Flexible CO buttons
Flexible DSS buttons
Programmable Feature (PF) buttons
Flexible MESSAGE button
[Button Usage]
Button
136
Function
Single-CO (S-CO)
Used to access a specified outside (CO) line for making or receiving calls (
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access).
Group-CO (G-CO)
Used to access an idle outside (CO) line in a specified outside (CO) line group
for making calls. Incoming calls from outside (CO) lines in the assigned outside
(CO) line group arrive at this button ( 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access).
Other-CO (O-CO)
Used to access an idle outside (CO) line for making calls. Incoming calls from
the assigned outside (CO) lines, which are not assigned to S-CO or G-CO
buttons, arrive at this button ( 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access).
Direct Station
Selection (DSS)
Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation (
One-touch Dialling
Used to call a preprogrammed party or access a feature with a one-touch
operation ( 1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling).
Message
Used to leave a message waiting indication, call back the party who left the
message waiting indication, or play back voice messages ( 1.17.1 Message
Waiting).
Message for another
extension
Used to access messages stored for another extension (
Waiting).
FWD/DND (Call
Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb)
Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension ( 1.3.1.1 Call
Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW).
Save
Used to store a telephone number while in a conversation with an outside party
or while hearing a busy tone, and then easily redial the number later ( 1.6.1.4
Redial).
Conference
Used to establish a 3-party or 5-party conference call (
Caller ID Indication—
Personal
Used to inform an extension user of calls logged in his or her personal area,
store the information of an incoming call during a conversation, and view caller
information while on-hook and then call back a caller ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call
Log).
Feature Guide
1.5.1.1 Intercom Call).
1.17.1 Message
1.13.1.2 Conference).
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
Button
Function
Caller ID Selection—
Personal
Used to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a
conversation, while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information, display
the number of logged calls while on-hook, and inform an extension user that the
personal area call log is full ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log).
Caller ID Indication—
Common
Used to inform an extension user of calls logged in the common area, store the
information of an incoming call during a conversation, and view caller
information while on-hook and then call back a caller ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call
Log).
Caller ID Selection—
Common
Used to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a
conversation, while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information, display
the number of logged calls while on-hook, and inform an extension user that the
common area call log is full ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log).
Log-in/Log-out
Used to switch between Log-in and Log-out status (
Day
Used to change the time service mode to day mode (
Night
Used to change the time service mode to night mode (
2.2.3 Time Service).
Lunch
Used to change the time service mode to lunch mode (
2.2.3 Time Service).
Extension Lock
Used to remotely lock or unlock another extension (
Features).
2-way Record
Used to record a conversation into the user's own mailbox (
APT Integration).
2-way Transfer
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension (
1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration).
Live Call Screening
(LCS)
Used to listen while a caller is leaving a message in the user's voice mailbox and,
if desired, intercept the call ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration).
LCS Cancel
Used to stop monitoring the user's own voice mailbox while a caller is leaving a
message, or stop the alert tone heard in private mode while a caller is leaving a
message ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration).
Voice Mail (VM)
Transfer
Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension (
Mail APT Integration).
1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out).
2.2.3 Time Service).
2.2.4 Operator/Manager
1.19.1 Voice Mail
1.19.1 Voice
Conditions
•
•
Extension button confirmation
A display PT user can confirm the button settings, such as the flexible CO button, by pressing the
corresponding button while on-hook.
The Day, Night, Lunch, and Extension Lock buttons can only be assigned to flexible DSS buttons at an
extension assigned as the operator or manager.
User Manual References
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Feature Guide
137
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.18.3 LED Indication
Description
The LED (Light Emitting Diode) of the Message/Ringer Lamp and the following buttons (Line Status Buttons
and Corresponding Extension Status Button) can indicate line status with a variety of light patterns.
Line Status Buttons: Single-CO (S-CO), Group-CO (G-CO), Other-CO (O-CO), INTERCOM
Corresponding Extension Status Button: Direct Station Selection (DSS)
1. Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp
•
•
•
Incoming call from an outside (CO) line/another extension: Red flashing
Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on
No messages present and no incoming call: Off
2. Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons
Line Status
Button
Light
Pattern
S-CO
G-CO
This extension is holding the line.
This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Call Hold
or using the line for an unattended conference.
–
138
Feature Guide
–
–
Another extension
is holding the line.
–
Incoming call
Incoming call
–
Line(s) in use
Red on
Rapid red
flashing
INTERCOM
This extension is using the line.
Moderate–
speed green
flashing
Slow red
flashing
O-CO
Idle
Off
Green on
Slow green
flashing
Rapid green
flashing
Intercom
Line Status
Outside (CO) Line Status
–
–
–
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
3. Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button
Corresponding Extension
Status Button
DSS
Light Pattern
Off
Idle
Slow red flashing
Call Forwarding (FWD)*
Moderate-speed red flashing
Do Not Disturb (DND)*
Red on
Busy
* This setting can be changed through system programming (
DSS Lamp Mode [112]).
4. Flashing Light Patterns
1s
Slow Flashing
Moderate Flashing
Rapid Flashing
Conditions
•
Incoming outside (CO) line calls arrive on available buttons in the following priority:
S-CO
G-CO
O-CO
Feature Guide References
1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
1.12.1 Call Hold
1.13.1.2 Conference
Feature Guide
139
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.18.4 Display Information
Description
A display proprietary telephone (PT) can relay the following information to the user while making or receiving
calls:
Display Item
Display Example
Condition
The extension number and name of the
calling or called extension
101: Tom Smith
Extension numbers and names
are programmable ( Extension
Number [009], Extension Name
[604]). If an extension name is not
stored, only the extension number
will be displayed.
The status of the called extension
101: Busy
–
The name and number of the doorphone DoorPhone 1
–
The telephone number dialled
1234567890
–
102:Mike
–
The extension number and name of the
calling extension after the call is
forwarded
The received call information
a) Caller's name
ABC Company
b) Caller's number
12345678
c) Outside (CO) line number
Call on CO 1
Duration of the current outside (CO) line
call
CO 1 0:01'15
The first line message can be
either (a) or (b) at each extension
through system programming (
Caller ID Log Priority [904]).
The display remains for 5
seconds after the call is finished.
The outgoing outside (CO) line
call duration starts when the
specified time expires ( Call
Duration Counter Start [204]).
The display does not show the
duration of intercom calls.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
140
Display Contrast
The display contrast can be adjusted with the Navigator key or the CONTRAST selector. This is
available only for PTs.
Ringer Volume
The volume of the ringer can be adjusted with the RINGER Volume selector.
Self-extension Number
A display PT user can confirm his or her own jack number and extension number on the display. Every
time the " " key is pressed, the display switches between "date (month [day], day [month]) and time",
"date (month [day], day [month], year, day of the week)", and "extension number (and extension name
if stored)".
Date and Time Set
The current date and time are set through system programming ( Date & Time [000]) or the operator/
Feature Guide
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
•
manager service features. The time format shown on the display PTs while on-hook, "12 h" or "24 h",
can also be selected through system programming ( LCD Time Display [010]).
Characters (name) or digits (number) exceeding the maximum length of the display are not displayed.
Although in this case information may not be displayed properly, the received information is not altered.
When the information displayed by pressing specific buttons (One-touch Dialling, REDIAL, Save) while
on-hook exceeds 17 characters, the "&" mark will be shown on the right side of the display.
User Manual References
2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
Feature Guide
141
1.19 Voice Mail Features
1.19 Voice Mail Features
1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration
Description
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) that supports APT Integration can provide many features and
conveniences that are unachievable using traditional voice mail systems that rely on Inband (DTMF)
Integration.
Many of these features are explained below. For more information, refer to the Installation Manual supplied
with the Panasonic VPS.
1. Automatic Configuration—Quick Setup (or DIP switch initialisation without a PC)
The PBX shares information with the VPS during setup that allows the VPS to automatically create the
appropriate mailboxes for all extension numbers.
The following settings to enable APT Integration must be programmed through system programming to
match the settings of the VPS.
Extension
group 8
VPS
3
Port 1
4
Port 2
PBX
This example uses a Panasonic KX-TVP50 series VPS, which can be connected with 2-conductor wire
to 2 extension jacks of the PBX.
[Programming Example: Voice Mail Table]
*
APT Integration
VM 1 APT Port*
Enable
Port 03 & 04
VM 1 APT Port [130]
In this example:
When "Port 03 & 04" is selected for VPS, extension jacks 03 and 04 are placed in extension group 8
automatically ( Extension Group [600]). Also the idle extension hunting type is set as "Circular
Hunting" ( Hunting Type [101]), and the Voice Mail (VM) Hunting Chain and Automated Attendant
(AA) Hunting Chain are automatically enabled in the extension group ( Hunting Group Set [100]).
Note
When "Disable" is selected, the other settings above are reset to their default values.
2. AA Service
Allows the VPS to answer calls and direct callers to dial a number in order to connect themselves to the
desired party (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party.").
It is possible to access VM service from AA service to, for example, record messages.
142
Feature Guide
1.19 Voice Mail Features
3. VM Service
Allows callers to leave voice messages for specific parties, such as an extension user. Extension users
can then listen to the messages left in their mailboxes at their convenience.
AA Service
A VPS can be used for the AA service as well as the VM service. When a call is directed to a port of the
VPS that is in AA service mode, the caller will hear an outgoing message (OGM). After or while listening to
the OGM, the caller may dial an extension number as directed (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the
desired party.").
1. AA to Extension
AA receives and answers outside (CO) line calls and offers services such as transferring to an
extension or mailbox using DTMF signalling from the calling party.
Outside (CO) Line Call
DIL
PBX
VPS
Extension
Transfer
AA 1
Busy/No Answer
(Record message)
AA 2
AA Hunting Chain
2. Extension Backup
If the VPS is assigned to ring with other extensions, for example the operator, for the same outside (CO)
line, the VPS can be used as a backup for the operator when the operator cannot answer an incoming
outside (CO) line call.
In order to use this feature, Delayed Ringing must be set for the VPS ( Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/
Lunch [411-413]).
Outside (CO) Line Call
Normal
PBX
Immediately
Extension
(e.g., Operator)
VPS
10 s delay
15 s delay
AA 1
AA 2
3. Status Notification to the VPS
When a call is redirected to the VPS, the PBX sends the status of the called extension to the VPS. This
allows the VPS to appropriately handle the call, playing the appropriate OGM for the caller. For
example, if the called extension is in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, the OGM (e.g., "I am unable to
answer your call right now, but I will get back to you shortly.") can be played.
Feature Guide
143
1.19 Voice Mail Features
VM Service
1. Accessing a Mailbox
The PBX sends special messages to the VPS to indicate which mailbox should be accessed (Followon ID).
2. FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS
An extension user can set his or her calls to be forwarded to the VPS ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)). When a call is received at the extension, the PBX sends the extension's mailbox number to the
VPS, and the VPS answers the call with the appropriate OGM (e.g., "Hi, I'm out of the office today...").
Outside (CO) Line Call
DIL, DISA
PBX
Intercom Call
(by Extension,
Operator, etc.)
VPS
Extension
FWD
Port 1
Port 2
VM Hunting
Chain
3. Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS
Outside (CO) line calls via DISA ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) can be programmed
to be automatically redirected to an extension user's mailbox when the extension user does not or
cannot answer them ( 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing). The VPS can answer the call with an OGM (e.g., "I
can't take your call now...") and callers can leave messages in the mailbox. In order to use this feature,
a voice mail extension number must be assigned as the intercept destination for the original destination
extension that received the call ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416], Flexible Ringing—
Day/Night/Lunch [408-410], Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]), and "Intercept" must be
selected through system programming ( DISA Intercept Mode [507]).
Outside (CO) Line Call
DISA
PBX
VPS
Extension
Intercept
Immediately
5 s delay
Port 1
Port 2
4. Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS
Extension users can transfer calls to a mailbox, after which callers can leave a message for the desired
party. While answering a call, the extension user simply presses the VM Transfer button and enters the
extension number of the party the caller wishes to leave a message for. The VPS will answer the
transferred call and record a message into the appropriate mailbox.
VM Transfer Button
In order to use this feature, the extension user must use a flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS)
button customised as a VM Transfer button. A voice mail extension number must be assigned to the
144
Feature Guide
1.19 Voice Mail Features
button when creating it.
5. Listening to Recorded Messages
After the VPS records a message, it will light the appropriate lamp or button on the extension for which
the message was intended, to indicate that there is a new message ( 1.17.1 Message Waiting). The
proprietary telephone (PT) user can play the message back simply by pressing the MESSAGE button
used for mailbox access; he or she does not need to enter a mailbox number. A single line telephone
(SLT) user hears a special dial tone (dial tone 3) when going off-hook if there are any messages in his
or her mailbox, and can play the message back by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature
number.
6. Live Call Screening (LCS)
Similar to a conventional home answering machine, LCS allows a PT user to monitor his or her own
mailbox as a caller is leaving a message and, if desired, answer the call simply by pressing the LCS
button.
PT users can choose one of 2 ways to perform LCS, through personal programming (Live Call
Screening [LCS] Mode Set):
Hands-free mode: The user can screen calls automatically through the built-in speaker.
Private mode: The user will hear an alert tone when a message is being recorded in his or her mailbox.
To screen calls, the user must press the MONITOR, SP-PHONE, or LCS button.
LCS/LCS Cancel Button
A flexible CO/DSS button can be customised as an LCS or LCS Cancel button.
7. 2-way Recording into the VPS
PT users can record their own telephone conversations. These recordings can be stored in the PT
user's own mailbox (2-way Record) or in another user's mailbox (2-way Transfer), depending on which
button the user presses to begin recording.
2-way Record/2-way Transfer Button
A flexible CO/DSS button can be customised as a 2-way Record or 2-way Transfer button.
Note
You should inform the other party that the conversation will be recorded before beginning to record
any telephone conversation.
Conditions
[General]
•
A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features:
– FWD—All Calls
– FWD—Busy/No Answer
– DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA)
For these features, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension
because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS. If a DISA call is forwarded to the VPS by the
IRNA feature from a DISA ring group, the PBX will send the VPS the mailbox number of the extension
within the DISA ring group that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack.
[Live Call Screening (LCS)]
•
To prevent the unauthorised screening of calls, a 3-digit password must be entered when activating LCS
for an extension. If the user forgets his or her password, it can be cleared by the operator or manager
(LCS Password Control).
Feature Guide
145
1.19 Voice Mail Features
•
•
If an extension user is screening a call and then goes off-hook to answer it, the VPS will either stop or
continue recording the message, according to system programming ( LCS Recording Mode Set
[620]).
If a call arrives while an extension user is having a conversation with another party and the extension
has Call Waiting activated, the user will hear a call waiting tone. The user can put the existing call on
hold before accessing LCS.
[2-way Recording into the VPS]
•
If all ports of the VPS are busy when a user tries to record a conversation:
– The user hears an alarm tone when pressing the 2-way Record button.
– The user hears an alarm tone after pressing the 2-way Transfer button followed by an extension
number.
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
User Manual References
1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
146
Feature Guide
1.19 Voice Mail Features
1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration
Description
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) or similar product from another manufacturer can provide
Automated Attendant (AA) and Voice Mail (VM) services when connected to the PBX.
The VPS and PBX communicate with each other by sending DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) signals.
For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the VPS.
1. AA Service
Allows the VPS to answer calls and direct callers to dial a number in order to connect themselves to the
desired party (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party."). It is possible to access VM
service from AA service to, for example, record messages.
2. VM Service
Allows callers to leave voice messages for specific parties, such as an extension user. Extension users
can then listen to the messages left in their mailboxes at their convenience.
AA Service
A VPS can be used for the AA service as well as the VM service. When a call is directed to a port of the
VPS that is in AA service mode, the caller will hear an outgoing message (OGM). After or while listening to
the OGM, the caller may dial an extension number as directed (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the
desired party.").
If the VPS transfers a call via the AA service, the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called party
using a DTMF status signal so that the VPS will know the status. This enables the VPS to quickly play an
appropriate OGM to the caller (e.g., "I'm handling another call now...", "I'm away from my desk now...", etc.).
The DTMF status signals sent by the PBX are explained below.
[DTMF Status Signals]
Status
Condition
DTMF Status Signal
Ringback Tone
The PBX is ringing the corresponding
extension.
1
Busy Tone
The called extension is busy.
2
Reorder Tone
The dialled number is invalid.
3
DND Tone
The called extension has set DND (
Do Not Disturb (DND)).
Answer
The called extension has answered the call.
5
Confirm
The PBX confirms that a feature (such as
Message Waiting) has been set or cancelled on
the extension.
9
Disconnect
The caller has hung up.
#9
FWD to VM Ringback Tone
The called extension has set FWD to VPS (
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)) and the PBX is
calling another port of the VPS.
6
FWD to VM Busy Tone
The called extension has set FWD to VPS and
all ports of the VPS are busy.
7
1.3.1.3
4
Feature Guide
147
1.19 Voice Mail Features
Status
FWD to Extension Ringback
Tone
Condition
DTMF Status Signal
The PBX is calling an extension other than the
one dialled, most likely because the called
extension has set its calls to be forwarded to
another extension or because it is a member of
an idle extension hunting group ( 1.2.1 Idle
Extension Hunting).
8
System Programming
The following settings to enable Inband (DTMF) Integration must be programmed through system
programming to match the settings of the VPS. This example uses a Panasonic KX-TVP series VPS, which
can be connected to up to 2 extension jacks of the PBX.
[Programming Example: Voice Mail Table]
Voice Mail Port*2
DTMF Integration*1
Enable
*1
*2
*3
Numbering Plan*3
Jack 03
Jack 04
Enable
Enable
Plan 1 or Plan 2
DTMF Integration [103]
DTMF Integration Port [102]
Extension Number [009]
In this example:
To enable the VM Hunting Chain and AA Hunting Chain, programme as follows:
1) Assign all Voice Mail extensions to one extension group in Extension Group [600].
2) Assign "Enable" to the group in Hunting Group Set [100].
3) Select the hunting type of the group in Hunting Type [101].
VM Service
1. Accessing a Mailbox
The PBX sends DTMF signals to the VPS to indicate which mailbox should be accessed (Follow-on
ID).
2. Listening to Recorded Messages
After the VPS records a message, it will light the appropriate lamp or button on the extension for which
the message was intended, to indicate that there is a new message ( 1.17.1 Message Waiting). The
proprietary telephone (PT) user can play the message back simply by pressing the MESSAGE button
used for mailbox access. When the button is pressed, the PBX calls the voice mail extension, then
sends DTMF signals to the VPS to indicate the extension's mailbox number.
A single line telephone (SLT) user hears a special dial tone (dial tone 3) when going off-hook if there
are any messages in his or her mailbox, and can play the message back by entering the Message
Waiting Answer feature number.
Conditions
•
148
A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features:
Feature Guide
1.19 Voice Mail Features
–
–
–
•
•
•
•
FWD—All Calls
FWD—Busy/No Answer
DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) ( 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing, 1.15.6 Direct Inward
System Access (DISA))
For these features, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension
because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS. If a DISA call is transferred to the VPS by
IRNA from a DISA ring group, the PBX will transmit the mailbox number of the receiving extension with
the lowest jack number.
In order to achieve proper recording quality, Data Line Security should be turned on for the VPS (
1.10.5 Data Line Security).
Each extension's mailbox number is the same as its extension number.
If "TA series" cannot be selected with the PBX type setup menu of the KX-TVP series VPS, select "KXT1232". Follow the steps for the KX-T1232.
If a call is directed to a VPS port while the operator or manager is recording or playing back an OGM
for DISA/UCD, the PBX cannot send a DTMF signal to the VPS, and so the VPS answers the call with
an OGM (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party.").
User Manual References
1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Feature Guide
149
1.20 Administrative Information Output Features
1.20 Administrative Information Output Features
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Description
Automatically logs detailed information for the PBX.
1. SMDR Output Port
The Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to output Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
data to a PC, printer, etc.
2. SMDR Output Data
Outside (CO) line call information (Incoming/outgoing) can be logged and sent to the SMDR output
port.
3. SMDR Format and Contents
Date
Ext. CO
Dial number
Duration
Code
12/31/05 12:52PM 103
03 12345678901234567890123456789012
00:00'16"
....
12/31/05 12:53PM 103
02
> 2013570846
00:01'43"
....
00:07'48"
00:00'43"
....
....
<
incoming
12/31/05 *12:54PM 101 02
12/31/05 12:55PM 101B 02
<
incoming
< BV incoming
> 1234567890123456
> 2013570846
12/31/05 12:56PM 107B 03
< DIL incoming
> 0921234557
12/31/05
1:04PM 103
01 092. . . 1438
00:01'43"
....
00:00'06"
4536
12/31/05
1:04PM 102
03
< DISA incoming
> 2013570846
00:00'09"
.... 0
12/31/05
1:05PM 103
01
< DISA incoming
>
00:00'08"
.... 0
01 092123456789
12/31/05
1:06PM 103
00:00'08"
....
12/31/05
1:06PM C-03 02 0921234567
00:00'17"
.... 2
12/31/05
1:07PM 103
01 0921234567
00:11'00"
. . 13
12/31/05
2:15PM 103
01 0921234567
00:11'00"
.101
12/31/05
2:26PM 103
01 F/0927654321
00:03'00"
....
12/31/05
2:27PM 108
03 9=0924567123
00:13'55"
....
12/31/05
3:25PM
02
00:11'48"
....
(1)
150
Time
Feature Guide
(2)
(3)
(4)
< UCD waiting >
(5)
(6)
(7)
1.20 Administrative Information Output Features
[Explanation]
The following table explains the types of data logged by SMDR. The section numbers below refer to the
field indicated by the numbers above.
Section Number
Data
Description
(1)
Date
Shows the date (Month/Day/Year) of the call ( Date & Time
[000]). The date order varies depending on the user's country/
area.
(2)
Time
Shows the start time of a call as hour/minute/AM or PM. Also
shows the following code:
*: Transferred call ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer)
(3)
Ext. (Extension) Shows the number of the extension that was engaged in the
call.
Also shows the following codes:
xxxB: Call answered by the BV feature ( 1.15.7 Built-in
Voice Message (BV))
(xxx=Number of the extension to which the call was directed
before the BV feature answered)
Even if a caller does not leave a voice message, for example,
by going on-hook while hearing a personal/common BV
outgoing message (OGM), the information is logged.
C-xx: Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) line call via the DISA
feature ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))
(xx=Outside (CO) line number that receives the DISA call)
(4)
CO
Shows the outside (CO) line number used for the call.
Feature Guide
151
1.20 Administrative Information Output Features
Section Number
(5)
Data
Dial Number
Description
[Outside (CO) Line Call]
Outgoing Outside (CO) Line Call
Shows the dialled telephone number (max. 32 digits). Digits
shown are as follows:
0 through 9, , #, - (hyphen)
F/: Flash/recall signal ( 1.10.6 Flash/Recall)
=: Host PBX Access code marker ( 1.5.2.7 Host PBX
Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from
a Host PBX)) The marker is displayed between the Host PBX
Access code and the dialled number when a Host PBX Access
code is entered.
. (dot): Secret Dialling
Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call
Shows <incoming> + the caller's telephone number (max. 16
digits). A caller's telephone number is displayed only when an
optional Caller ID card is installed and "With CID" is selected
in Caller ID SMDR Format [906]. It is also possible to show a
caller's telephone number before the call is answered (
Caller ID SMDR Printout [907]).
Also shows the following codes:
<DISA incoming> + the caller's telephone number (max. 16
digits): Incoming outside (CO) line call via the DISA feature
<BV incoming>: Incoming outside (CO) line call to the
common message area of the BV feature
<DIL incoming>: Incoming outside (CO) line call via the DIL
feature ( 1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL))
<UCD waiting>: Incoming outside (CO) line call via the UCD
feature ( 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD))
When the UCD waiting call is answered, a new record is
started.
152
Feature Guide
(6)
Duration
Shows the duration of the outside (CO) line call or the UCD call
waiting time in hours/minutes/seconds.
(7)
Code
Shows the account code appended to the call ( 1.5.2.3
Account Code Entry), the account code index number (e.g.,
13), the number of the extension that used the Walking COS
feature (e.g., 101), or DISA security code status (e.g., 0).
0: A DISA incoming call without a DISA security code
1 to 4: A DISA incoming call with a DISA security code number
Actual DISA security codes are not printed by SMDR ( DISA
Security Code [512]).
1.20 Administrative Information Output Features
The following data can be controlled through system programming to adjust whether (or how) they are
printed or displayed by SMDR.
[Programmable Items]
Item
Description
Incoming/Outgoing outside
(CO) line call
Controls whether incoming/outgoing outside (CO) line calls are
shown ( Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802]). Even
if "On" or "Toll" is selected for outgoing outside (CO) line calls or even
if "On" is selected for incoming outside (CO) line calls, when "MODE
2" is selected in SMDR Mode for Printing [929], the call log
information is not displayed by SMDR, but the information for each
extension is displayed by Call Log Printout.
If "Toll" is selected for outgoing outside (CO) line calls, only calls that
are checked in TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305] and are
allowed, are shown.
Caller's identification
Controls whether a caller's telephone number is shown ( Caller ID
SMDR Format [906]). When this is set to display telephone numbers,
even if the PBX receives a caller's name by the Caller ID feature, only
the telephone number is shown.
Secret Dialling
Controls whether secret dialling numbers stored in System Speed
Dialling Number [001] or stored in One-touch Dialling button are
shown by SMDR ( Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803]).
Account Code
Controls whether the account code stored in Account Code [310] or
just the index of the account code is shown ( SMDR Account Code
[805]). The index of the account code is shown when "Verify-All" or
"Verify-Toll" is selected in Account Code Mode [605].
System programming items
Controls whether system programming items that have already been
assigned are shown based on the following parameters ( System
Data Dump [804]):
a) All para: All data
b) System para: All data except for "CO para", "Extn. para",
"DSS para" and "Speed dial"
c) CO para: The data assigned for each outside (CO) line
d) Extn. para: The data assigned for each extension
e) DSS para: The data assigned on the Direct Station
Selection (DSS) buttons and Programmable Feature (PF)
buttons on the DSS Console
f)
Speed dial: The System Speed Dialling numbers and
names in System Speed Dialling Number [001] and System
Speed Dialling Name [011]
g) Stop output: Not shown
Conditions
•
Multilingual Display by SMDR
It is possible to select the display language used for SMDR through system programming (
Language [806]).
SMDR
Feature Guide
153
1.20 Administrative Information Output Features
•
•
•
The PBX waits for a preprogrammed length of time ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]) after the end
of seizing an outside (CO) line or dialling before starting the SMDR timer for outgoing outside (CO) line
calls. When the PBX has sent out all dialled digits to the telephone company and this timer expires, the
PBX begins measuring the duration of the call. A display proprietary telephone (PT) shows the elapsed
time of the call. The starting time and the total duration of the call are logged by SMDR.
For SMS users
When an SLT user makes an SMS centre call ( 1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support), in some
cases the duration of the call may not be verified with SMDR, because it takes very little time to send
SMS messages. To verify the duration of these calls, it is recommended to set the start timer of call
duration to "5 s" or "Instantly" through system programming ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]).
SMDR Format
The following SMDR format parameters can be set through system programming ( SMDR Parameter
[801]) in order to match the paper size being used by the printer:
a) Page Length: determines the number of lines per page.
b) Skip Perforation: determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
The page length should be at least 4 lines longer than the skip perforation length.
The title is placed on the first 3 lines of every page.
Skip
Perforation
Page
Length
(66 lines)
Machine
Perforation
•
Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters
The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface (RS-232C port)
through system programming ( SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800]):
a) New Line (NL) Code: Select the code appropriate for the PC or printer. If the PC or printer
automatically feeds lines with carriage return, select "CR". If not, select "CR+LF".
b) Baud Rate: Baud rate indicates the transmission speed of data from the PBX to the PC or printer.
c) Word Length: Word length indicates how many bits compose each character.
d) Parity Bit: Parity bit indicates what type of parity is used to detect errors in the string of bits
composing a character. Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC
or printer.
e) Stop Bit Length: Stop bit indicates the end of a bit string that composes a character. Select an
appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.
Installation Manual References
2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals
154
Feature Guide
1.20 Administrative Information Output Features
1.20.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension
Description
An extension assigned as the manager extension can use the following features through manager
programming:
a) Call Log Print Out and Clear, for Each Extension
b) All Clear
[Example]
The manager can print out call logs for each extension. Up to 500 outgoing outside (CO) line calls can be
logged in the PBX. When the call log is full, the oldest call will be replaced each time a call is received.
The call logs stored since the manager cleared the call log for the extension can be printed out.
**********************************************
*
103 : Tony Viola
*
**********************************************
Starting Date
Present Date
(1)
Date
Time
12/31/05 *12:52PM
12/31/05 1:06PM
12/31/05 1:07PM
12/31/05 2:15PM
12/31/05 2:26PM
: Dec.29.05 07:00PM**
: Dec.31.05 09:00AM
Ext.
CO
Dial number
Duration
Code
103
103
103
103
103
03
01
01
01
01
12345678901234567890123456789012
092123456789
0921234567
0921234567
F/0927654321
00:00'16"
00:00'08"
00:11'00"
00:11'00"
00:03'00"
....
....
..13
.101
....
(1) "Starting Date" shows the start date (Month/Day/Year) of the call log. When it is different from
"Present Date", "**" is shown, indicating that there may be overwritten calls that are not shown on the
print out. The date order varies depending on the user's country/area.
Conditions
•
•
Even if an extension user holds a call, the duration of the call will be counted. If an extension user
transfers the call, the count of duration will restart at the destination extension.
SMDR Mode for Printing
One of the following modes can be selected through system programming ( SMDR Mode for Printing
[929]):
a) MODE 1
Outside (CO) line call information can be displayed by SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)), and call log information for each extension can be displayed by Call Log
Printout.
b) MODE 2
Only call log information for each extension can be displayed by Call Log Printout.
User Manual References
3.2.2 Printing and Clearing Call Logs
Feature Guide
155
1.21 Extension Controlling Features
1.21 Extension Controlling Features
1.21.1 Extension Feature Clear
Description
Extension users can simultaneously clear all of the following features set on their own telephone:
Feature
Value after Extension Feature Clear
Absent Message
Off
Automatic Callback Busy
Off
Background Music (BGM)
Off
Call Forwarding (FWD)
Off
Call Pickup Deny
Allow
Call Waiting
Disable
Data Line Security
Off
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Off
Executive Busy Override Deny
Allow
Hot Line
The stored telephone numbers will be cleared.
Log-in/Log-out
Log-in
Message Waiting
All messages left by other extensions will be cleared.
Paging Deny
Allow
Room Monitor
Off
Timed Reminder
Cleared
Voice Mail Integration
Off
This feature is also known as Station Feature Clear or Station Programme Clear.
User Manual References
1.7.8 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
156
Feature Guide
1.21 Extension Controlling Features
1.21.2 Timed Reminder
Description
Each extension user can set an alarm to be used as a wake-up call or reminder. This feature can be
programmed to activate daily or one time only. If the user goes off-hook during the alarm, a special dial tone
(dial tone 3) will be heard.
Remote Timed Reminder
An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can remotely set, cancel, and confirm the
timed reminder of the desired extension. This feature is useful, for example, for a small hotel or motel to set
a wake-up call for an extension in a guest room, or for a parent to set a wake-up call for an extension in a
child's room.
Conditions
•
•
•
Be sure that the PBX clock is set to the correct time.
Setting a new alarm time clears the previous alarm time.
There is no limit for the number of the extensions that can set Timed Reminder at the same time.
User Manual References
1.7.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
2.1.3 Setting an Alarm for Other Extensions (Remote Timed Reminder [Wake-up Call])
Feature Guide
157
1.22 Audible Tone Features
1.22 Audible Tone Features
1.22.1 Dial Tone
Description
The following dial tones inform extension users about features activated on their extensions:
Type
Description
Tone 1
A normal dial tone is heard when none of the features listed for dial tones 2
through 5 have been set.
Tone 2
Heard when any of the following features is set.
•
Absent Message
•
Background Music (BGM) (for proprietary telephones [PTs] only)
•
Call Forwarding (FWD)
•
Call Pickup Deny
•
Data Line Security
•
Do Not Disturb (DND)
•
Extension Lock
•
Hot Line (for single line telephones [SLTs] only)
•
Message Waiting (for PTs only)
•
Remote Extension Lock
•
Timed Reminder
Tone 3
Heard when any of the following features is performed.
•
Account Code Entry
•
Answering a call from Timed Reminder
•
Going off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting
Tone 4
Heard when going off-hook if new voice messages have been recorded (Built-in
Voice Message [BV]).
Tone 5
Heard when going off-hook if the remaining voice message recording time is less
than 5 minutes or if 125 voice messages have been recorded (Built-in Voice
Message [BV]).
Conditions
•
Dial Tone Type for ARS/Account Code Entry (Verify-Toll mode only)
Through system programming, it is possible to select the dial tone type for the Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)/Account Code Entry (Verify-Toll mode only) feature ( ARS Dial Tone [362]).
Feature Guide References
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
158
Feature Guide
1.22 Audible Tone Features
1.22.2 Confirmation Tone
Description
At the end of a feature operation, the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation
tone to the extension user.
Type
Description
Tone 1
Sent when the setting is accepted, or sent when the Extension Lock feature is
set or cancelled.
Tone 2
Sent when the new setting is identical to the previous one, or sent when certain
features are successfully performed or accessed (e.g., Call Hold, Automatic
Callback Busy).
Tone 3
Sent before a conversation is established when accessing the following features:
•
Call Pickup
•
Call Hold Retrieve with the Feature Number
•
Conference
•
Paging/Paging Answer
Conditions
•
It is possible to eliminate confirmation tone 3 (except for Call Hold Retrieve with the Feature Number)
through system programming ( Call Pickup Tone [117], Conference Tone [105], External Pager
Access Tone [106]).
Feature Guide References
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
Feature Guide
159
1.22 Audible Tone Features
160
Feature Guide
Section
2
System Configuration and Administration
Features
Feature Guide
161
2.1 System Configuration—Hardware
2.1
System Configuration—Hardware
2.1.1
Extension Jack Configuration
Description
Extension jacks are used to connect proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), Direct
Station Selection (DSS) Consoles, and Voice Processing Systems (VPSs) to the PBX.
Conditions
•
•
•
162
PT and SLT in Parallel Mode
A PT and an SLT can be connected to an extension jack and used in parallel mode.
DSS Console and Paired Telephone Assignment
When a DSS Console is connected, a PT must be paired with the DSS Console through system
programming ( DSS Console Jack Assignment [003], Console Paired Telephone [004]). Each
extension jack number should be unique.
Automatic Detection
A PT and an SLT can be connected to an extension jack with no programming required.
Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2
System Configuration—Software
2.2.1
Class of Service (COS)
Description
Each extension is assigned a class of service (COS) number ( TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]).
The following features operate differently depending on an extension's COS.
a) TRS ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS))
b) Walking COS ( 1.8.4 Walking COS)
Conditions
•
Walking COS
An extension user can make a call from an extension with a lower COS by using his or her own COS
temporarily.
User Manual References
1.2.6 Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Walking COS)
Feature Guide
163
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2.2
Group
Description
This PBX supports various types of groups.
1. Outside (CO) Line Group
Outside (CO) lines can be grouped into 3 outside (CO) line groups based on properties such as carrier
or outside (CO) line type ( CO Line Group Number [404]).
Each outside (CO) line can belong to only one outside (CO) line group.
2. Extension Group
Extensions can be grouped into 8 extension groups ( Extension Group [600]).
Each extension group can have the following attribute set:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Call Pickup Group
Paging Group
Idle Extension Hunting Group
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Group
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring Group
Every extension must belong to one extension group and cannot belong to more than one extension
group.
Assignable Extensions: Proprietary telephones (PTs)/single line telephones (SLTs)
[Example]
Extension Group 1
Extension Group 2
Extension Group 3
Extension Group 4
Extn. 101 Extn. 102
Extn. 103 Extn. 104
Extn. 105 Extn. 106
Extn. 107 Extn. 108
2.1. Call Pickup Group
Using the Call Pickup feature, extensions can answer any calls within the call pickup group to which
they belong.
2.2. Paging Group
Using the Paging feature, extensions can make a page to any paging group, or answer a page
made to any group.
2.3. Idle Extension Hunting Group
If a called extension is busy, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member
of the same extension group ( Hunting Group Set [100]). When calls are received, idle
extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type ( Hunting
Type [101]): Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting.
2.4. Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Group
A UCD group is a group of extensions that receives UCD calls directed to the group ( UCD Group
[520]). To use this feature, "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired
outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
164
Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.5. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring Group
A DISA ring group is a specific extension group that receives DISA calls directed to the group. All
extensions in the group assigned as an Automated Attendant (AA) destination ( DISA Built-in
AA [501]) ring simultaneously. To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution
method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]) and
"With AA" must be selected as the destination of incoming outside (CO) line calls via the DISA
feature ( DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]).
Feature Guide References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
1.14.1 Paging
Feature Guide
165
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2.3
Time Service
Description
Time service modes are used by many PBX features to determine how they will function during different
times of day. For example, incoming calls can be directed to sales staff during the day and to a Voice
Processing System (VPS) at night, extension users can be prohibited from making long-distance calls
during lunch time, etc.
There are 3 time service modes—day, night, and lunch. The start times of each time service mode and end
time of lunch mode are programmed for each day of the week in a Time Table.
1. Time Service Switching Mode
The current time service mode can switch automatically to another time service mode at the time
assigned in the Time Table. It is possible, however, to switch time service modes manually.
Whether time service modes are normally switched manually or automatically is determined through
system programming ( Time Service Switching Mode [006]).
Switching Mode
Automatic
Description
Condition
The current time service mode will switch
automatically to another time service mode at
the time assigned in the Time Table, and can be
switched manually by pressing the Day, Night,
or Lunch button or by entering the Time Service
feature number.
The current time service
mode (day/night/lunch)
and the switching mode
(automatic/manual) can
be switched manually by
an extension assigned
as the operator or
The current time service mode will switch only
manager extension.
when the Day, Night, or Lunch button is pressed
or when the Time Service feature number is
entered.
Manual
2. Time Table
A Time Table has 3 modes—day, night, and lunch. A Time Table can be programmed to control when
each time service mode starts (and therefore, the previous time service mode ends), and can be
programmed separately for each day of the week.
[Programming Example: Time Table]
Time Schedule*
*
166
Day
Night
Start Time
Start Time
Start Time
End Time
Sunday
Not Stored
Not Stored
Not Stored
Not Stored
Monday
09:00
17:00
12:00
13:00
Tuesday
09:00
17:00
12:00
13:00
(Cont.) :
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Time Service Start Time [007]
Feature Guide
Lunch
2.2 System Configuration—Software
[Visualisation of Time Schedule]
Monday
00:00
Tuesday
03:00
06:00
09:00
12:00
15:00
18:00
21:00
00:00
Time Table
Night
Day
Lunch
Day
Lunch Day
Night
Night
Note that time service modes can be arranged as they are needed (for example, night mode can occur
in the morning and afternoon, if necessary) and not all time service modes need to be used in a time
schedule. Also note that day mode or night mode resumes automatically when lunch mode ends.
3. Programming Items Using Time Service
The following programming items will be affected by the time service:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]
Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only)
DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only)
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]
Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]
Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]
4. Day/Night/Lunch Button
A flexible Direct Station Selection (DSS) button can customised as a Day, Night, or Lunch button by the
operator or manager.
These buttons can be used to switch the current time service mode.
Each button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Status
Off
Day/Night/Lunch off
Red on
Day/Night/Lunch on
Note
Extension users can press the "#" key on their proprietary telephones (PTs) to display the current
time service mode.
Conditions
•
The start times of each time service mode and end time of lunch mode can be specified through system
programming ( Time Service Start Time [007]).
Feature Guide
167
2.2 System Configuration—Software
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
User Manual References
1.7.7 Checking the Time Service Mode
2.1.2 Switching the Time Service Mode (Time Service)
168
Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2.4
Operator/Manager Features
Description
This PBX supports one operator and one manager. Any extension can be designated as the operator
through system programming ( Operator Assignment [008]). The operator is the destination of Operator
Call. The extension connected to extension jack 01 is the manager extension. An extension assigned as the
operator or manager extension is allowed to use certain features that most extensions cannot, as follows:
Feature
Manager
Programming
Description
Manager
Password*
Details in
System Speed
Sets the System Speed
Dialling Number Dialling number.
[001]
Required
• 1.6.1.5 Speed
Dialling—
Personal/System
System Speed
Dialling Name
[011]
Sets the System Speed
Dialling name.
Required
• 1.6.1.5 Speed
Dialling—
Personal/System
DISA Security
Code [512]
Sets the DISA security
code.
Required
• 1.15.6 Direct
Inward System
Access (DISA)
DISA Security
Code Digits
[530]
Sets the number of digits for Required
the DISA security code.
• 1.15.6 Direct
Inward System
Access (DISA)
Call Log Printout Prints and clears call logs
for Each
for each extension.
Extension
Extension
Password Set
Required
• 1.20.2 Call Log
Printout for Each
Extension
Sets the extension
Required
password. This password is
used for the Walking COS
feature and the Remote
Extension Lock feature.
Each extension's password
should be unique.
–
Remote Extension Lock
Sets or cancels Extension
Lock on an extension
remotely.
Not required
• 1.8.3 Extension
Lock
Time Service
Switches the time service
mode manually.
Not required
• 2.2.3 Time
Service
Remote Timed Reminder (Wake-up Sets or cancels Timed
Not required
Call)
Reminder to any extension
remotely.
• 1.21.2 Timed
Reminder
Incoming Call Log in the Common Clears all Caller ID
Area—CLEAR ALL
information stored in the
common area.
• 1.16.2 Incoming
Call Log
Not required
Feature Guide
169
2.2 System Configuration—Software
Feature
Description
Incoming Call Log Display Lock in Locks or unlocks the
the Common Area
Incoming Call Log for the
common area.
Manager
Password*
Details in
Not required
• 1.8.3 Extension
Lock
• 1.16.2 Incoming
Call Log
301st Incoming Call Logged in the Selects how new calls are Not required
Common Area
treated when Incoming Call
Log for the common area is
full.
• 1.16.2 Incoming
Call Log
Outgoing Message (OGM) for
DISA/UCD
Records and plays back
Not required
OGMs used by DISA,
Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD), and 3-level
Automated Attendant (AA).
Erases OGMs used by
DISA and UCD.
• 1.15.5 Outgoing
Message (OGM)
for DISA/UCD
Date and Time Setting
Adjusts the current date
and time.
Not required
–
Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL
Cancels Extension Lock,
Incoming Call Log Display
Lock in the Personal Area,
and Message Waiting for
Another Extension Lock at
all extensions.
Not required
• 1.8.3 Extension
Lock
• 1.16.2 Incoming
Call Log
• 1.17.1 Message
Waiting
LCS Password Control
Clears the Live Call
Not required
Screening (LCS) password.
• 1.19.1 Voice
Mail APT
Integration
Common BV OGM
Records, plays back, and
Not required
erases a common BV OGM
in the common message
area that can be accessed
by either the operator or
manager.
• 1.15.7 Built-in
Voice Message
(BV)
* The system password may be entered instead of the extension password for the manager (manager
password).
Operator Call
An extension user can call the operator by entering the Operator Call number ( Automatic Line Access
[121]), often simply, "0". If no operator is assigned, the caller will hear a reorder tone. If the Automatic Line
Access number is assigned to "0" through system programming, the Operator Call number will be changed
to "9".
Note
For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.
170
Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
User Manual References
1.2.1 Basic Calling
2.1 Control Features
3.2.2 Printing and Clearing Call Logs
Feature Guide
171
2.3 System Data Control
2.3
System Data Control
2.3.1
PC Programming
Description
System programming settings can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TEA308 Maintenance
Console software as well as by using a proprietary telephone (PT) ( 2.3.2 PT Programming). System
programming and data upload/download can be performed either through on-site programming or remote
programming.
1. On-site Programming: Programming that is performed using an on-site PC connected directly to
the PBX.
2. Remote Programming: Programming that is performed using an off-site PC that connects to the
PBX via an outside (CO) line.
Note
The release date of the KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console software will vary depending on the user's
country/area.
1. Connection Methods for On-site Programming
Method
172
Description
Required
Hardware
Serial Interface
(RS-232C port)
The PC is connected to the PBX via the Serial Interface (RS232C port) of the PBX.
—
USB
The PC is connected to the PBX via the USB port of the PBX.
—
Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
2. Connection Methods for Remote Programming
Method
Remote modem
Description
Required
Hardware
Call the PBX and have the call directed to the internal modem User-supplied
using one of the following methods:
modem
Direct Access: Using a modem, dial the telephone number to
connect to the internal modem. To use this feature, "MODEM"
must be selected as the distribution method for the desired
outside (CO) line port ( CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch
[414-416]).
DISA: Using a telephone, dial the telephone number to reach
the DISA line ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)).
After hearing a DISA outgoing message (OGM), enter the
Remote Maintenance feature number to access the internal
modem. To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the
distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port (
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
Call Transfer: Using a telephone, call an extension user, such
as the operator, to request to be transferred to the internal
modem using the Remote Maintenance feature number (
1.11.1 Call Transfer).
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
Only one system programming session is permitted at a time. Access will be denied to a second party
who tries to perform system programming, including system programming via a PT.
System programming can be performed either in interactive or batch mode.
System Password
To access system programming in interactive mode, a valid password must be entered. The password
is set at the factory but can be changed through system programming ( System Password [002]).
A user can upload system programming data from a PC to the PBX or download it from the PBX to a
PC.
If communications between the PBX and PC fail before completing Firmware Upgrade or system
programming data upload from a PC to the PBX, the successfully transferred portion of the data can
still be used.
Firmware Upgrade can be performed only through on-site programming using Serial Interface (RS232C port) or USB.
Installation Manual References
3.2.1 Connection
3.2.3 Accessing PBX via Internal Modem
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL)
Feature Guide
173
2.3 System Data Control
3.2 PC Programming
174
Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.2
PT Programming
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) can be used to customise the settings of the PBX or of an extension, using the
following programming features:
Programming Type
Description
Example
Authorised
Programmer
Personal
Programming
Used by an extension user to
customise the extension's
settings.
One-touch Dialling,
Line Preference—
Outgoing, etc.
Extension user
System Programming
Used by an authorised party to
customise the PBX.
System Password,
Authorised
Extension Number, etc. administrator
Manager
Programming
Used by the manager to
customise 4 system
programming settings of the
PBX, set a password to each
extension, and print out call log
information for each extension.
System Speed Dialling Manager
Number, Extension
Password Set, Call Log
Printout for Each
Extension, etc.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The manager extension is the extension that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack (jack 01) of the
PBX and can therefore perform manager programming.
Only one system programming (including PC programming) or manager programming session is
permitted at a time. These 2 programming features cannot be performed simultaneously by 2 users.
During programming, the PT is considered to be busy and will not receive calls.
System Password
To access system programming, the administrator system password must be entered. The system
password is set at the factory but can be changed through system programming ( System Password
[002]). The administrator can programme all system programming.
Manager Password
To set the manager password, it is necessary to use the system password to perform Extension
Password Set. Once set, the manager password can be used to access manager programming.
The manager can assign a password to each extension (extension password).
Personal Programming Data Reset
A PT user can simultaneously reset all settings made through personal programming (Line
Preference—Incoming/Outgoing, Call Waiting Tone Type Selection, etc.) to their default settings.
This feature also cancels pressing the AUTO ANS/MUTE button in the Hands-free Answerback feature
and the Room Monitor feature.
System Programming Data Reset
The PBX can return all or specific settings made through system programming to their default settings
based on the following parameters ( System Data Clear [999]):
a)
b)
c)
d)
All para: All data
System para: All data except for "CO para", "Extn. para", and "DSS para"
CO para: The data assigned for each outside (CO) line
Extn. para: The data assigned for each extension
Feature Guide
175
2.3 System Data Control
e) DSS para: The data assigned on the Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons and Programmable
Feature (PF) buttons on the DSS Console
f)
Speed dial: The System Speed Dialling numbers and names in System Speed Dialling Number
[001] and System Speed Dialling Name [011]
Installation Manual References
2.10.1 Starting the Advanced Hybrid System
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features
3.3 PT Programming
User Manual References
3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)
3.2 Managing Call Logs
3.3 Customising Your PBX (System Programming)
176
Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.3
Automatic Time Adjustment
Description
The PBX clock can be adjusted automatically according to the time information received from your
telephone company. Time information can be received when an incoming call with Caller ID that includes
time information is received.
The PBX clock will be adjusted every day with the first call after 3:05 A.M., if enabled through system
programming ( Automatic Time Adjustment [152]).
Note
Since the PBX clock is put ahead by one hour on the Summer Time start date, a timed reminder set
within one hour of the Automatic Time Adjustment feature will not ring.
Since the PBX clock is put back by one hour on the Summer Time end date, a timed reminder set within
one hour before the Automatic Time Adjustment feature will ring 2 times.
Conditions
•
SMDR will log call information using the PBX clock so that the logging time will be overlapped at the
end of Summer Time ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).
Feature Guide References
1.21.2 Timed Reminder
Feature Guide
177
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.4
Feature Numbering
Description
To call another extension user or to access PBX features, access numbers (extension numbers or feature
numbers) are required.
Feature numbers are available while:
1.
2.
3.
4.
a dial tone is heard
a busy tone or Do Not Disturb (DND) tone is heard
dialling or talking
on-hook
1. Feature Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)
Extension numbers and features that are available while a dial tone is heard have fixed numbers and
flexible numbers respectively, shown in the following table:
a) Extension Numbers:
The extension numbering plan can be selected through system programming ( Extension
Number [009]).
When the extension numbering plan is selected, the default extension numbers change
automatically as follows*:
Plan 1/Plan 2: extension jacks 01 through 08—extension numbers 101 through 108
Plan 3: extension jacks 01 through 08—extension numbers 11 through 18
If a rotary single line telephone (SLT) is used at any extension, select "Plan 1".
Note
* For United Kingdom and New Zealand, when the extension numbering plan is selected, the
default extension numbers change automatically as follows:
Plan 1/Plan 2: extension jacks 01 through 08—extension numbers 201 through 208
Plan 3: extension jacks 01 through 08—extension numbers 21 through 28
b) Feature Numbers:
When "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected, feature numbers starting with "7" are useable with and
without "#" added before "7".
[Example]
The default feature number for setting "Do Not Disturb (DND)" is "714#". "714#" and "#714#" are
both available for "Plan 2" and "Plan 3".
To make them easier to remember, it may be helpful to replace the new feature numbers for "Plan
2" and "Plan 3" with the code numbers 50 through 59, through system programming ( Second
Feature Numbering Plan [012]).
178
Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
[Feature Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)]
Numbering
Feature
Additional Number
Plan 1
Absent Message (set/cancel)
Account Code Entry for an SLT
Plan 2
Plan 3
75
(1–6 [+ parameter]/
0) + #/0
account code +
outside phone no.
or 49
Automatic Line Access (Local Access)*1
9/0
outside phone no.
Built-in Voice Message (BV) (record/play/
erase)
725
([1 + extn. no.]/2/0) +
#/0
Call Forwarding (FWD)—All Calls, Busy/No
Answer (set/cancel)
71
([1 or 2 + extn. no.]/
0) + #/0
20
#20
Call Hold Retrieve for outside (CO) line calls/
intercom calls
53/5
#59/#5
outside (CO) line no.
(1–3)/extn. no.
Call Park/Call Park Retrieve*3
22/52
#22/#56
0–9
Call Hold (Hold Mode 2 or 3) for an SLT*2
Call Pickup Deny (set/cancel)
72
(1/0) + #/0
Call Waiting for intercom calls/doorphone
calls (set/cancel)
732
(1/0) + #/0
Call Waiting for outside (CO) line calls (set/
cancel)
731
(1/0) + #/0
Common BV Outgoing Message (OGM)
(record/play/erase)
722
01–24 + (1/2/0) + #/0
Conference (5-party)
22
Data Line Security (set/cancel)
Directed Call Pickup
730
4
Do Not Disturb (DND) (set/cancel)
Doorphone Call/Door Open
(phone no. + CONF)
4 times + CONF
#22
(1/0) + #/0
#41
extn. no.
71
31/55
(4/0) + #/0
#31/#55
1/2
Executive Busy Override Deny (set/cancel)
733
(0/1) + #/0
Extension Lock (set/cancel)
77
0000–9999 (2 times/
one time) + #/0
Extension Number*4
100–199
100–499
10–49
External Feature Access (EFA) for an SLT
6
Extension Feature Clear
79
#/0
FWD—Follow Me (set/cancel)
71
(5/8) + extn. no. + #/
0
FWD to BV (set/cancel)
71
([1 or 2 + 725]/0) + #/
0
Feature Guide
179
2.3 System Data Control
Numbering
Feature
Additional Number
Plan 1
Plan 3
FWD to Outside (CO) Line (set/cancel)
71
(3 + outside (CO)
line access no. +
outside phone no. +
#)/(0 + #/0)
FWD to Voice Processing System (VPS)
(set/cancel)
71
([1 or 2 + extn. no.]/
0) + #/0
Group Call Pickup
40
#40
Hot Line for an SLT (programme)
74
2 + phone no. + #
Hot Line for an SLT (set/cancel)
74
(1/0) + #/0
Incoming Call Log in the Personal Area—
CLEAR ALL
Last Number Redial for an SLT
#
70
Incoming Call Log in the Common Area—
CLEAR ALL
#
70
## or 80
### or 80
Live Call Screening (LCS) Password (set/
cancel)
77
000–999 (2 times/
one time) + #
Log-in/Log-out
736
(0/1) + #/0
Logging of Caller ID Information in the
Common Area (set/cancel)
738
(2/0) + #/0
Logging of Caller ID Information in the
Personal Area (set/cancel)
738
(1/0) + #/0
Message Waiting (leave/cancel for a caller)
70
(1/2) + extn. no. + #/
0
Message Waiting (cancel all for a called
extension)
70
0 + #/0
Message Waiting (cancel all for another
extension)
70
3 + extn. no. + #
Message Waiting Answer
784
#/0
Message Waiting for Another Extension
Lock (set/cancel)
70
4000–9999 (2 times/
one time) + #/0
Operator Call
0/9
Outside (CO) Line Group Access
8
1–3 + outside phone
no.
Paging—All Extensions & External
33
#33
Paging—All Extensions/Group
33
#33
Paging—External
34
#34
Paging Answer
43
#43
Paging Deny (set/cancel)
180
Plan 2
Feature Guide
734
or 9
0/1–8
(1/0) + #
2.3 System Data Control
Numbering
Feature
Additional Number
Plan 1
Plan 2
Plan 3
Personal BV OGM (record/play/erase)
723
(1/2/0) + #/0
Personal Speed Dialling (confirm)
3
0–9 + #
Personal Speed Dialling (dial)
1
or #
1
or ##
0–9
Personal Speed Dialling (programme)
2
Remote Maintenance
729
Remote Timed Reminder (set/cancel/
confirm)
764
extn. no. + # + 76 +
([hhmm +
parameter]*5/2/3) +
#
Room Monitor (set/cancel)
735
(1/0) + #
Room Monitor through a doorphone
31
0–9 + phone no. + #
#31
System Speed Dialling for an SLT (dial)
1/2
00–99
Timed Reminder (set/cancel)
76
([hhmm +
parameter]*5/2) + #/
0
Timed Reminder (confirm)
76
3+#
Time Service (set/cancel)
78
([1–3]/0) + #
Walking COS
7
extn. password + the
user's extn. no. + #/0
21st Incoming Call Logged in the Personal
Area (disregard the newest call/overwrite
the oldest call)
737
(0/1) + #
301st Incoming Call Logged in the Common
Area (disregard the newest call/overwrite
the oldest call)
737
(2/3) + #
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
For New Zealand: 1 or 9
For United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 50; Plan 2/Plan 3: #50
For United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 36/56; Plan 2/Plan 3: #36/#56
For United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 200–299; for New Zealand: Plan 2: 200–
499, Plan 3: 20–49
hh: hour (01–12), mm: minute (00–59), AM/PM (0/1), one time/daily (1/2)
Feature Guide
181
2.3 System Data Control
2. Feature Numbering (available while a busy tone or DND tone is heard)
Features that are available while a busy tone or DND tone is heard have fixed numbers, as shown in
the following table:
[Feature Numbering Table (available while a busy tone or DND tone is heard)]
Feature
Numbering
Automatic Callback Busy
6
Busy Station Signalling (BSS)/DND Override
2
Executive Busy Override
3
3. Feature Numbering (available while dialling or talking)
Features that are available while dialling or talking have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table:
[Feature Numbering Table (available while dialling or talking)]
Feature
Numbering
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM)
4*1
Conference (3-party) for an SLT
3*2
Door Open
5
Pulse to Tone Conversion
#
*1 Dial after dialling the TAM's extension number and hearing its busy tone.
*2 Plan 1: 3; Plan 2/Plan 3: #3
4. Feature Numbering (available while on-hook)
Features that are available while on-hook have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table:
[Feature Numbering Table (available while on-hook)]
Feature
Numbering
Background Music (BGM) set/cancel
1
Time Service mode display
#
Extension number and extension name display/
date (month [day]/day [month]) and time display/
date (month [day]/day [month]/year/day of the week) display
changing
Conditions
•
•
182
If a feature number includes " " or "#" except for those that can use "0" instead of "#", rotary SLT users
cannot use it.
Feature number + Additional number (Parameter)
Certain feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active. For example, to set Call
Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
Waiting, the feature number for "Call Waiting" must be followed by "1" and to cancel it, the same feature
number should be followed by "0".
User Manual References
4.2.1 Feature Number Table
Feature Guide
183
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.5
Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type
Description
The dialling mode (DTMF [Dual Tone Multi-Frequency]/Pulse) of connected outside (CO) lines is
automatically assigned after restarting the PBX using the System Clear Switch or through system
programming ( System Data Clear [999]). No system programming in Dial Mode [401] and Pulse Speed
[402] is required unless the dialling mode of the connected outside (CO) line is Call Blocking. Automatic
Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type can also be programmed the first time the PBX is accessed with
a PC using the KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console software (Quick Setup). For more information about
Quick Setup, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.1.1 Installing KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console on a PC).
Conditions
•
•
•
•
If no outside (CO) lines are connected to the outside (CO) line ports of the PBX, the default values are
assigned automatically.
It takes a maximum of 4 minutes to complete checking the dialling mode, unless the outside (CO) line
is in use. In this case, the PBX will start checking it after the outside (CO) line becomes idle.
This feature will not function properly when:
– It takes 3 seconds or more to detect the dialling mode of your telephone company.
– The cable from the outside (CO) line is disconnected while the PBX is checking the dialling mode.
If your telephone company or a host PBX can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals, the PBX selects
an outside (CO) line type according to the following priority:
DTMF
Pulse (High)
Pulse (Low)
Installation Manual References
4.1.5 System Reset with System Data Clear
Feature Guide References
1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection
184
Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.6
Country Setting
Description
The country code of the PBX can be selected through system programming ( Country [995]). The PBX
will restart with the default settings of the user's country/area. During this operation, communication
between the PBX and PC will be disconnected one time. Country Setting can also be programmed the first
time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console software (Quick Setup).
For more information about Quick Setup, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.1.1 Installing KX-TEA308
Maintenance Console on a PC).
Conditions
•
This feature is only available when the suffix of the connected PBX is "NE" or "CE".
Feature Guide
185
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.7
Firmware Upgrade
Description
It is possible to upgrade the PBX software via the Serial Interface (RS-232C port) or USB port using the KXTEA308 Maintenance Console software. Even if a user upgrades the PBX software, the system data will not
be lost. For more information on how to upgrade the PBX software, refer to the on-line help.
Conditions
•
The ROM and the firmware version can be confirmed through system programming (
Version [998]).
Installation Manual References
2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals
186
Feature Guide
Firmware
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
2.4
Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
2.4.1
Power Failure Transfer
Description
If the power supply to the PBX fails, outside (CO) line 1 will be automatically connected to extension jack 01
(Power Failure Connections). The PBX will switch from the current connections to Power Failure
Connections, and all existing conversations will be disconnected.
Only outside (CO) line calls handled by Power Failure Connections can be made during a power failure.
Conditions
•
•
•
We recommend connecting an SLT in parallel at extension jack 01, so that the SLT can be used during
a power failure.
Note that if the parallelled SLT is on an outside (CO) line call when the power is restored, that call will
be disconnected.
Only outside (CO) line calls are possible during a power failure. All other features will not function.
Automobile-type batteries, which must be user-supplied, can be connected as a system backup power
supply to operate all the features during a power failure.
The batteries can be connected directly to the unit with optional cables. For more information, refer to
the Installation Manual.
Installation Manual References
2.2.6 Connecting Backup Batteries
2.9 Power Failure Connections
Feature Guide References
1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone
Feature Guide
187
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
2.4.2
Power Failure Restart
Description
When the electricity is turned back on, the PBX restarts and automatically loads stored data.
Conditions
•
188
In the event of a power failure, PBX memory is protected by a factory-installed lithium battery. There is
no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy ( 1.7.1 Automatic Callback Busy
(Camp-on)), Call Park ( 1.12.2 Call Park), and Redial ( 1.6.1.4 Redial).
Feature Guide
Section
3
Programming Instructions
Feature Guide
189
3.1 Introduction
3.1
Introduction
3.1.1
Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the
Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System. The PBX has default settings that can be changed to meet your
needs. These settings control the manner in which the PBX features described in this Feature Guide
function, and changing these settings is referred to as "system programming". System programming can be
performed by only one person at a time. A second person attempting to programme the system will be
denied access to system programming.
Ways to Programme
There are 2 programming methods:
•
PC Programming
PC programming is described in Section 3.2 PC Programming.
•
PT (Proprietary Telephone) Programming
PT programming is described in Section 3.3 PT Programming. An authorised administrator or the
manager can perform system programming by entering 3-digit programming numbers with a PT.
Password Security
To maintain system security, a password is required to perform system programming. When KX-TEA308
Maintenance Console is started for the first time, the Quick Setup utility will ask you to set the system
password. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, do not disclose the password.
Warning to the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1. Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers if it
becomes known to others.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, maintain the secrecy of the
password.
3. We strongly recommend that you change the default password value to something else for reasons
of system security. It is best to use a password of 7 digits.
4. Please change the password periodically.
5. If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a
PC, and checking the password using the KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console software. If you do
not have a backup of the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and
reprogramme it. Therefore, we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For
more information on how to back up the system data, refer to the on-line help that appears by
selecting the Help menu during PC programming. However, as system passwords can be extracted
from backup copies of the system data file, do not allow unauthorised access to these files.
Note
This PBX has only one system password. It can be changed by either PT programming or PC
programming. For this reason, the password can consist of numerals only.
190
Feature Guide
3.2 PC Programming
3.2
PC Programming
3.2.1
Installing and Starting KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console
To programme and administer the PBX by PC (Personal Computer), you need to install KX-TEA308
Maintenance Console onto the PC. To install and start KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console when the PC and
the PBX are connected, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.1.1 Installing KX-TEA308 Maintenance
Console on a PC). KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console starts the programme using the drive where you
installed the software automatically.
Note
The release date of KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console will vary depending on your country/area.
System Requirements
Operating System
•
Microsoft ® Windows ® 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP
Hardware
•
•
•
CPU: 300 MHz Intel ® Celeron ® or faster
RAM: At least 128 megabytes (MB) of available RAM
Hard disk space: At least 100 MB of space for the installation, and approximately 2 MB of additional
space for user files.
Feature Guide
191
3.3 PT Programming
3.3
PT Programming
3.3.1
Programming Instructions
Required Telephone
PBX settings can be customised through system programming by using a proprietary telephone (PT) with
a display, such as the KX-T7730. An authorised administrator or the manager extension connected to
extension jack 01 can access system programming.
Only one system programming session can be performed at a time; that is, only one user can access system
programming at a time. This includes PC programming.
Buttons and Functions
Fixed Button (KX-T7730/KX-T7735)
Function
PREV (PREVIOUS)
NEXT
–
–
SECRET
STORE
PAUSE
PROGRAM
END
SELECT
192
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Fixed Button (KX-T7730/KX-T7735)
Function
FLASH
CLEAR
Entering System Programming Mode
Using a PT to perform system programming allows an authorised administrator to set a wide range of PBX
features and parameters. To enter system programming mode, the system password is required. With the
system password, all system programming is accessible.
#
System Password for
Administrator—for PT Programming
Programming No.
3 digits
1234
Note
means default value throughout these programming instructions.
Entering Manager Programming Mode
Using a PT to perform manager programming allows the manager extension (extension jack 01) to set
certain PBX features and parameters. To enter manager programming mode, the extension password for
the manager (manager password) is required.
With the manager password, the following 4 system programming settings are accessible:
•
System Speed Dialling Number [001]
•
System Speed Dialling Name [011]
•
DISA Security Code [512]
•
DISA Security Code Digits [530]
#
Notes
•
•
Extension Password for Manager
—for PT Programming
Programming No.
3 digits
The system password may be entered instead of the manager password.
With the manager password, the manager can also set a password to each extension, and print
out call log information for each extension. For more information on how to assign a password to
each extension including the manager password and to print out call log information for each
extension, refer to the User Manual ( 2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming
Mode, 3.2.2 Printing and Clearing Call Logs).
Feature Guide
193
3.3 PT Programming
Entering Characters
The PT's dialling buttons can be used to enter characters when storing a name or message. The following
tables depict the available characters:
Table 1 (Alphabet mode)/Table 2 (Numeral mode)
194
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Table 3 (Cyrillic alphabet mode for RU [Russia]/UA [Ukraine] model)
* This character is only available for the KX-T7735RU.
[Example of Entering Characters]
To enter "Ann":
n
A
2
Notes
•
6
n
(5 times)
OR
6
(5 times)
To toggle between "Alphabet mode" and "Numeral mode" or between "Alphabet mode", "Cyrillic
alphabet mode (assignable only in Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] )", and "Numeral mode", press
SELECT.
•
To move the cursor right, press
.
•
To delete all characters, press CLEAR. To delete a character, press
.
Feature Guide
195
3.3 PT Programming
List of Abbreviations
A
AA
Automated Attendant
APT
Analogue Proprietary Telephone
ARS
Automatic Route Selection
BGM
Background Music
BV
Built-in Voice Message
CO
Outside (CO) Line
COS
Class of Service
CPC
Calling Party Control
DIL
Direct In Line
DISA
Direct Inward System Access
DND
Do Not Disturb
DRD
Distinctive Ring Detection
DSS
Direct Station Selection
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
E
EFA
External Feature Access
G
GRP
Group
I
IRNA
Intercept Routing—No Answer
L
LCS
Live Call Screening
O
OGM
Outgoing Message
P
PT
Proprietary Telephone
S
SLT
Single Line Telephone
SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording
SMS
Short Message Service
TAM
Telephone Answering Machine
TRS
Toll Restriction
U
UCD
Uniform Call Distribution
V
VM
Voice Mail
B
C
D
T
196
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
3.3.2
Programming Procedures
Notes
•
means default value throughout these programming instructions.
•
•
means to select "All" throughout these programming instructions.
The following are displayed when you store a number, such as a telephone number, or feature
number:
P: PAUSE; -: CONF; F: FLASH/RECALL; [ ]: INTERCOM
x: PAUSE (substitutes for any number [i.e., wild card])
•
•
•
To return to the previous programming item, press
.
To correct a wrong entry, press CLEAR and then enter the new input.
To delete a stored parameter, press CLEAR, enter the new input, and then press STORE.
•
•
Press
or
to scroll the display.
Some programmes cannot have a value left empty.
Date & Time [000]
0
0
0
NEXT
➞
year
(Jan.…Dec.)
(00…99)
➞
SELECT
(1…12)
(Sun…Sat)
Notes
•
•
hour
➞
➞
SELECT
➞
minute
SELECT
(00…59)
day
➞
(1…31)
STORE
END
(AM/PM)
The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed.
The PBX supports years from 2000 to 2099.
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Speed Dialling Number [001]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
0
0
1
NEXT
speed dialling no.
(00…99)
phone no.
STORE
END
Max. 32 digits
(0…9, , #, P, –, F, [ ])
To continue
SELECT
Notes
•
An Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9], 81 through 83) should be
included before the phone number. When dialling, a pause will automatically be inserted after the
Outside (CO) Line Access number.
Feature Guide
197
3.3 PT Programming
•
When storing an account code assigned in Account Code [310], enter
after an Outside (CO) Line Access number.
and the account code
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features
System Password [002]
0
0
2
NEXT
password
STORE
END
4-7 digits
(0000…9999999)
1234
WARNING
To maintain system security, a password is required to perform system programming.
To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, do not disclose the
password.
Warning to the Administrator regarding the system password
1. Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers if it
becomes known to others.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, maintain the secrecy of the
password.
3. We strongly recommend that you change the default password value to something else for reasons
of system security. It is best to use a password of 7 digits.
4. Please change the password periodically.
5. If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a
PC, and checking the password using the KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console software. If you do
not have a backup of the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and
reprogramme it. Therefore, we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For
more information on how to back up the system data, refer to the on-line help that appears by
selecting the Help menu during PC programming. However, as system passwords can be extracted
from backup copies of the system data file, do not allow unauthorised access to these files.
Note
This PBX has only one system password. It can be changed by either PT programming or PC
programming. For this reason, the password can consist of numerals only.
Feature & Programming References
2.3.1 PC Programming
2.3.2 PT Programming
198
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
DSS Console Jack Assignment [003]
0
0
3
NEXT
DSS console no.
extension jack no.
(1…2)
(02…08/Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
NEXT
Notes
•
•
•
•
or
PREV
To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step.
The same jack number cannot be assigned to 2 DSS Consoles.
Do not assign extension jack 01 (manager extension) as the DSS Console jack.
The extension jack number preassigned as a paired telephone in Console Paired Telephone [004]
should not be assigned in this programme.
Feature & Programming References
1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
2.1.1 Extension Jack Configuration
Console Paired Telephone [004]
0
0
4
NEXT
DSS console no.
extension jack no.
(1…2)
(01…08/Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
NEXT
Notes
•
•
•
or
PREV
To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step.
The extension jack number preassigned as a DSS Console in DSS Console Jack Assignment [003]
should not be assigned in this programme.
An SLT cannot be paired with the DSS Console.
Feature & Programming References
1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
2.1.1 Extension Jack Configuration
One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005]
0
0
5
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(With Transfer/
Without Transfer)
Feature Guide
199
3.3 PT Programming
Note
With Transfer: Press the DSS button to transfer an outside (CO) line call.
Without Transfer: Press the TRANSFER button, then the DSS button to transfer an outside (CO) line
call.
Feature & Programming References
1.11.1 Call Transfer
1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
Time Service Switching Mode [006]
0
0
6
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Manual/Automatic)
Feature & Programming References
2.2.3 Time Service
Time Service Start Time [007]
Time Service Start Time [007]
0
0
7
NEXT
NEXT
or PREV
(Sun…Sat)
SELECT
or
➞
(Every day) (Day/Night/
Lunch-start/
Lunch-end)
To go to another day of the week
To go to another mode
➞
hour or SELECT*
(1…12)
minute
(00…59)
➞
SELECT
STORE
END
(AM/PM)
To remain the settings unchanged,
keep pressing SELECT until "None" is displayed
Notes
•
•
This programme is available when switching mode is enabled in automatic mode in Time Service
Switching Mode [006].
* Pressing SELECT shows the previous entry. When the display shows "None", press SELECT to
set the start time.
Feature & Programming References
2.2.3 Time Service
Operator Assignment [008]
0
0
8
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/Disable)
200
Feature Guide
STORE
END
3.3 PT Programming
Note
To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step.
Feature & Programming References
2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features
Extension Number [009]
0
0
9
SELECT
NEXT
STORE
(Plan 1/2/3)
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
extension jack no.
extension no.
(01…08)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Notes
•
•
Programmable extension numbers are as follows:
Plan 1: 100–199; Plan 2: 100–499; Plan 3: 10–49
(for United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 200–299; for New Zealand: Plan 2: 200–499, Plan 3:
20–49)
The same extension number cannot be entered for 2 different extension jacks.
Feature & Programming References
1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling
1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration
2.3.4 Feature Numbering
LCD Time Display [010]
0
1
0
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(12/24 h)
Note
The following settings and features use 12-hour format even if 24-hour format is assigned in this
programme:
Date & Time [000]
Time Service Start Time [007]
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.21.2 Timed Reminder
Feature Guide
201
3.3 PT Programming
System Speed Dialling Name [011]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
0
1
1
NEXT
speed dialling no.
(00…99)
name*
Max.
16 characters
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Note
* A name can be stored using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies depending on the
number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between "Alphabet mode"
and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT.
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
3.3.1 Programming Instructions—Entering Characters
Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
0
1
2
NEXT
code no.
(50…59)
feature no.
Max. 10 digits
(0…9, , #, P, –, F, [ ])
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Note
This programme is available only when "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected in Extension Number [009].
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling
2.3.4 Feature Numbering
202
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
0
1
3
NEXT
location no.
(1…9)
feature no.
STORE
END
Max. 24 digits
(0…9, , #, P, –, F, [ ])
To continue
SELECT
Notes
•
•
Any feature number can be stored in a One-touch button. However, the feature numbers for
Personal Speed Dialling, System Speed Dialling, and Quick Dialling do not function.
This feature is not available when the KX-T7710 is connected in parallel with a PT.
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
Hunting Group Set [100]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
1
0
0
NEXT
extension group no.
(1…8/
)
name*
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
Extension Group [600]
Hunting Type [101]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
1
0
1
NEXT
extension group no.
(1…8/
)
name*
SELECT
STORE
(Terminate/
Circular)
To continue
END
SELECT
Note
This programme is available when the extension group is enabled in Hunting Group Set [100].
Feature Guide
203
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
DTMF Integration Port [102]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
1
0
2
extension jack no.
NEXT
(03, 04/
)
name*
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration
DTMF Integration [103]
1
0
3
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Note
When a KX-TVP series VPS is connected to the PBX, to enable Inband (DTMF) Integration between
the VPS and the PBX, select "Plan 1" or "Plan 2" in Extension Number [009] and "Enable" in this
programme.
Feature & Programming References
1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration
DTMF Integration Port [102]
SLT Hold Mode [104]
1
0
4
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(Hold-1/Hold-2/
Hold-3)
Feature & Programming References
1.12.1 Call Hold
Conference Tone [105]
1
0
5
NEXT
SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.7.2 Executive Busy Override
1.13.1.2 Conference
204
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
External Pager Access Tone [106]
1
0
6
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.14.1 Paging
DTMF Receiver Check [107]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
1
0
7
NEXT
DTMF receiver no.
(1…2/
)
name*
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Note
This programme enables each DTMF receiver (1–2: checking extension jacks 01–08) to check whether
it is operating normally or not.
Connection References
4.1.3 Operation
Flash/Recall Mode for a Locked Extension [108]
1
0
8
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Note
This programme enables a locked extension to send a flash/recall signal during a conversation with an
outside party.
CO Indicator [109]
1
0
9
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Note
This programme is available for the extension(s) assigned not to ring in Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/
Lunch [408-410], to answer incoming outside (CO) line calls.
Flash/Recall Key Mode [110]
1
1
0
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(MODE1: EFA mode/
MODE2: Flash/Recall mode)
Feature Guide
205
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.10.6 Flash/Recall
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Music on Hold [111]
1
1
1
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Internal/
External/Tone)
Note
Selections vary depending on your country/area.
Feature & Programming References
1.12.4 Music on Hold
1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)
DSS Lamp Mode [112]
1
1
2
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Note
Enable: FWD—Flashing slowly, DND—Flashing at moderate speed
Disable: FWD—Off, DND—Off
Feature & Programming References
1.18.3 LED Indication
Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113]
1
1
3
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(0/3/10/
15 times)
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1.4 Redial
Automatic Redial Interval [114]
1
1
4
NEXT
SELECT
(40/60 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1.4 Redial
206
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]
1
1
5
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(Single/Double/
Triple)
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
Conference Pattern [116]
1
1
6
NEXT
SELECT
(3-party C-0 E-3/
3-party C-1 E-3/
3-party C-2 E-3/
5-party C-2 E-4)
Note
3-party C-0 E-3: No outside parties can attend a 3-party conference call.
3-party C-1 E-3: One outside party can attend a 3-party conference call.
3-party C-2 E-3: A maximum of 2 outside parties can attend a 3-party conference call.
5-party C-2 E-4: A maximum of 2 outside parties can attend a 3-party to 5-party conference call.
The PBX allows up to 2 outside parties to participate in a conference call. [C: CO, E: Extension]
Feature & Programming References
1.13.1.2 Conference
Call Pickup Tone [117]
1
1
7
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
Pulse Restriction [118]
1
1
8
NEXT
SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
Note
It is programmable whether pulse dialling is sent or not to the telephone company during a conversation
with an outside party when "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode is enabled in Dial Mode [401].
Feature Guide
207
3.3 PT Programming
Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119]
1
1
9
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection
Bell Frequency [120]
1
2
0
NEXT
SELECT
(20/25 Hz)
Note
This programme selects the bell frequency sent to an SLT.
Automatic Line Access [121]
1
2
1
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Dial 0/9)*
Note
* For New Zealand: 1 or 9
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features
Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122]
1
2
2
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Break Ratio [123]
1
2
3
NEXT
SELECT
(MODE1: 66 %/
MODE2: 60 %)
Note
This programme selects the pulse break ratio (the ratio between the length of the pulse and the length
of the pause) when a pulse is sent to the telephone company while dialling a telephone number.
208
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
TRS Check for * and # [125]
1
2
5
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
DSS Off-hook Mode [126]
1
2
6
NEXT
SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
Pickup Group [127]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
1
2
7
NEXT
extension group no.
(1…8/
)
name*
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
CO Indicator [109]
Ringback Tone Pattern [128]
1
2
8
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Single 3 s/Single 5 s/
Double 3 s/Double 5 s)
Note
This programme selects the ringback tone pattern for outgoing intercom calls and for incoming outside
(CO) line calls (including a DISA call).
Feature & Programming References
1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
Feature Guide
209
3.3 PT Programming
VM 1 APT Port [130]
1
3
0
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Port03/Port03 & 04/
Disable)
Notes
•
•
To change the current setting (other than "Disable"), select "Disable", then select the desired
setting.
This programme is not available when "Enable" is selected in DTMF Integration [103].
Feature & Programming References
1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration
SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142]
1
4
2
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(1:2/1:3/1:4)
[On:Off]
Note
This programme selects the ratio between the bell signals of an SLT (a set of bell-on and bell-off).
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]
SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]
1
4
3
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(1000…2000 ms)
[100 ms increments]
Notes
•
•
This programme selects the length of the bell-on signal of an SLT. This determines the ring tone
pattern for incoming calls to SLTs, combined with the setting in SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142].
This programme also determines the maximum number of digits of an SLT Caller ID number, when
"DTMF1" or "DTMF2" is selected in SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150].
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
1.16.1 Caller ID
210
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145]
1
4
5
NEXT
SMS centre no.
STORE
END
Max. 16 digits
(0…9, , #)
Feature & Programming References
1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support
SMS Routing Table—CO [146]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
1
4
6
NEXT
CO line no.
name*
SELECT
(1…3)
(Disable/1…3)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support
SMS Routing Table—Extension [147]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1
4
7
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08)
SELECT
STORE
END
(Disable/1…3)
To continue
SELECT
Note
Each location 1–3 has a maximum of 4 extensions.
Feature & Programming References
1.17.3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support
SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150]
1
5
0
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(FSK1 [During ring]/
FSK2 [RP-AS]/
DTMF1 [Immediately]/
DTMF2 [During ring])
Feature & Programming References
1.16.1 Caller ID
Feature Guide
211
3.3 PT Programming
SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151]
1
5
1
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.16.1 Caller ID
Automatic Time Adjustment [152]
1
5
2
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
2.3.3 Automatic Time Adjustment
Incoming Reverse [153]
1
5
3
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
Hold Recall Time [200]
2
0
0
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(30 s/
1/1.5/2/3/4/5/6 min/
Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.12.1 Call Hold
1.12.2 Call Park
Transfer Recall Time [201]
2
0
1
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(15/30 s/
1/2 min)
Feature & Programming References
1.11.1 Call Transfer
Call Forwarding Start Time [202]
2
0
2
NEXT
SELECT
(5/10/15/
20 s delay)
212
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Hot Line Waiting Time [203]
2
0
3
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(0…4 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1.7 Hot Line
Call Duration Counter Start [204]
2
0
4
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(5/10/15/20/25/30/35/
40/45/50 s after dialling/
Instantly)
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.5 Reverse Circuit
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Polarity Reverse Detection [424]
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]
2
0
5
time
NEXT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(1…32 min)
Feature & Programming References
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation
Dialling Start Time [206]
2
0
6
NEXT
SELECT
Refer to the note.*
Note
* The minimum length of time that the PBX waits after seizing an outside (CO) line before dialling that
can be selected depends on your country/area as follows:
For Czech Republic: 0 ms, 250 ms, 500 ms, 750 ms, 1000 ms, 1250 ms, 3500 ms
For Others: 0 ms, 250 ms, 500 ms, 750 ms, 1000 ms, 1250 ms, 1500 ms
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Feature Guide
213
3.3 PT Programming
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]
2
0
7
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(MODE1: 50-180 ms/
MODE2: 80-180 ms/
MODE3: 80-650 ms/
MODE4: 80-1000 ms/
MODE5: 200-1000 ms)
Feature & Programming References
1.12.1 Call Hold
Inter-digit Time [208]
2
0
8
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(5/10/15/20 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
No Dial Disconnection [211]
DTMF Time [210]
2
1
0
NEXT
SELECT
(MODE1: 80 ms/
MODE2: 160 ms)
Note
This programme selects the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to outside (CO) lines that have
been set to "DTMF" in Dial Mode [401].
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection
No Dial Disconnection [211]
2
1
1
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
Inter-digit Time [208]
Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]
2
1
2
NEXT
time
(1…32 min)
214
Feature Guide
STORE
END
3.3 PT Programming
Note
This programme is available for the extension(s) enabled in CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613].
Feature & Programming References
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation
Bell-off Detection [213]
2
1
3
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(3/6/12 s)
Note
This programme selects the minimum time required by the PBX to confirm that the bell signal is no
longer being sent from the telephone company, before the PBX acknowledges that the call is lost.
BV Recording Time [214]
2
1
4
NEXT
time
STORE
END
(1…20 min)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215]
2
1
5
NEXT
time
STORE
END
(1…15 min)
Note
This programme selects the maximum recording time for each personal/common BV OGM.
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Carrier Exception Code [300]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
3
0
0
NEXT
code no.
carrier code
STORE
(01…20)
Max. 10 digits
(0…9, , #, x)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Feature Guide
215
3.3 PT Programming
TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301]
3
0
1
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Class-1…5)
Feature & Programming References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
3
X
NEXT
(02…05)
code no.
phone no.
STORE
(01…20)
Max. 11 digits
(0…9, , #, x)
To continue
02: for Class 2
03: for Class 3
04: for Class 4
05: for Class 5
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
TRS—Exception Code [306]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
3
0
6
NEXT
code no.
phone no.
STORE
(01…80)
Max. 11 digits
(0…9, , #, x)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]
Emergency Number [309]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
3
0
9
NEXT
code no.
(1…5)
emergency no.
Max. 24 digits
(0…9)
SELECT
216
Feature Guide
STORE
To continue
END
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.2 Emergency Call
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
Account Code [310]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
3
1
0
NEXT
code no.
account code
(01…50)
4 digits
(0…9)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry
1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code
Account Code Mode [605]
Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
3
1
1
NEXT
code no.
pause code
STORE
(01…40)
Max. 11 digits
(0…9)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.6 Pause Insertion
Pause Time [417]
TRS—Extension Lock Class [312]
3
1
2
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(COS-2…5/
Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
1.8.3 Extension Lock
Feature Guide
217
3.3 PT Programming
ARS Selection [350]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
3
5
0
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
name*
SELECT
)
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
3
X
NEXT
(51…54)
code no.
area code
STORE
(01…80)
Max. 7 digits
(0…9, , #, x)
To continue
51: for Route 1
52: for Route 2
53: for Route 3
54: for Route 4
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
3
X
NEXT
(55…58)
code no.
area code
STORE
(01…80)
Max. 7 digits
(0…9, , #, x)
To continue
55: for Route 1
56: for Route 2
57: for Route 3
58: for Route 4
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
1st Carrier Selection Code [359]
3
5
9
NEXT
first carrier access code
Max. 4 digits (0…9)
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
218
Feature Guide
STORE
END
3.3 PT Programming
ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
3
6
0
NEXT
route no.
(1…4)
removed digits
STORE
END
(0…9)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
ARS Modification—Added Number [361]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
3
6
1
NEXT
route no.
added number
STORE
(1…4)
Max. 20 digits
(0…9, , #, P)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
ARS Dial Tone [362]
3
6
2
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(Tone1/Tone2/
Tone3/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.22.1 Dial Tone
ARS Inter-digit Time [363]
3
6
3
NEXT
time
(1…20 s)
Note
This assignment should be the same as the inter-digit timer assigned in Inter-digit Time [208].
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Feature Guide
219
3.3 PT Programming
ARS CO Line Group [364]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
3
6
4
NEXT
route no.
CO line group no.
(1…4)
(1…3/
STORE
END
)
To continue
SELECT
Note
The assignments in Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] are effective for this programme.
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
3
X
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
(81…84)
)
81: for Route 1
82: for Route 2
83: for Route 3
84: for Route 4
authorisation code
STORE
Max. 19 digits
(0…9, , #, P)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
3
X
NEXT
(85…88)
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
85: for Route 1
86: for Route 2
87: for Route 3
88: for Route 4
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
220
Feature Guide
name*
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
SELECT
END
END
3.3 PT Programming
Itemised Billing Code [389]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
3
8
9
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
itemised billing code
Max. 3 digits
(0…9, , #, P)
)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
3
9
0
NEXT
route no.
(1…4/
name* STORE
SELECT
)
(C.A.I.H/
C.I.A.H)
END
To continue
SELECT
Note
C: Carrier Access Code; A: Authorisation Code; I: Itemised Billing Code; H: Telephone Number
Feature & Programming References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
CO Line Connection [400]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
4
0
0
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
name*
SELECT
(Connect/
Not connect)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Note
The numbers of outside (CO) line ports that do not have lines connected should be set to "Not connect".
The PBX seizes the highest available outside (CO) line number when selecting an idle outside (CO)
line automatically. If an unconnected outside (CO) line number is set to "Connect" and is numbered
higher than any connected outside (CO) line number, the PBX will try to seize the unconnected outside
(CO) line.
Feature Guide
221
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Dial Mode [401]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
4
0
1
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
name*
SELECT
(DTMF/Pulse/
Call Block mode)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection
Pulse Speed [402]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
4
0
2
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
name*
SELECT
) (Low Speed: 10 pps/
High Speed: 20 pps)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection
Dial Mode [401]
Host PBX Access Code [403]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
4
0
3
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
access code
STORE
END
Up to 8 access codes
1 or 2 digits
To continue
(0…9, , #)
SELECT
Note
Insert "," (CONF/MESSAGE button) between each access code using the comma button on the overlay.
For example, to store access codes 81 and 82 on outside (CO) line 1, programme as follows:
403 NEXT 1 81,82 STORE END
222
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Pause Time [417]
CO Line Group Number [404]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
4
0
4
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
CO line group no.
STORE
END
(1…3)
)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
2.2.2 Group
Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
Go to next or prev. line number
➞
or
➞
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
4
X
NEXT
(05…07)
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
#
extension jack no. SELECT
(01…08/
05: for day
06: for night
07: for lunch
)
STORE
END
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
Go to another jack number
SELECT
To continue
Go to another line number
Note
It is impossible to disable all extensions for all outside (CO) lines in each time service mode (day/night/
lunch). In each mode, at least one extension must be allowed to make an outside (CO) line call.
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Feature Guide
223
3.3 PT Programming
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
Go to next or prev. line number
➞
➞
or
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
4
X
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
(08…10)
#
extension jack no. SELECT
(01…08/
)
08: for day
09: for night
10: for lunch
)
STORE
END
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
Go to another jack number
To continue
SELECT
Go to another line number
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.2 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection
1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
Go to next or prev. line number
➞
➞
or
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
4
X
NEXT
(11…13)
11: for day
12: for night
13: for lunch
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
#
extension jack no. SELECT
(01…08/
)
STORE
END
Refer to the note.*
To continue
Go to another jack number
To continue
SELECT
Go to another line number
Note
* The ringing start time that can be selected for extension(s) selected in Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/
Lunch [408-410] depends on your country/area as follows:
For United Kingdom: Immediately, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s
For Others: Immediately, 5 s, 10 s, 15 s
224
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
<To select Normal, UCD, and/or MODEM>
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
4
X
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
(14…16)
)
14: for day
15: for night
16: for lunch
name*
SELECT
STORE
(Normal/UCD/
MODEM)
END
To continue
SELECT
<To select BV>
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
4
X
NEXT
(14…16)
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
14: for day
15: for night
16: for lunch
name*
common BV OGM no. STORE
SELECT
name*
(BV)
END
(01…24)
To continue
SELECT
<To select DISA>
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
4
X
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
(14…16)
)
14: for day
15: for night
16: for lunch
name*
SELECT
DISA OGM no.
(DISA)
(1…8)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
<To select DIL>
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
4
X
NEXT
(14…16)
14: for day
15: for night
16: for lunch
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
name*
SELECT
(DIL)
extension jack no.
STORE
END
(01…08)
To continue
SELECT
Feature Guide
225
3.3 PT Programming
Notes
•
•
When you select "UCD", it is necessary to assign an extension group as the UCD group in UCD
Group [520].
After you select "BV", do not change Operator Assignment [008].
Feature & Programming References
1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL)
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
2.3.1 PC Programming
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]
Pause Time [417]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
4
1
7
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
name*
SELECT
(1.5/2.5/
3.5/4.5 s)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.6 Pause Insertion
1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311]
Host PBX Access Code [403]
Flash/Recall Time [418]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
4
1
8
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
name*
SELECT
(80/100/160/
300/600/900/
1200 ms)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.10.6 Flash/Recall
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
226
Feature Guide
STORE
To continue
END
3.3 PT Programming
Automatic Designated Line Access [419]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
4
1
9
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
name*
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.5.3.2 Line Preference—Outgoing
1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Automatic Line Access [121]
CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
4
2
0
NEXT
X
CO line no.
(1…3/
(00…75)
)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Note
CPC signal detect time selection number:
00: Disable; 01–75: 22–614 ms (detect time: 8 ms increments)
Feature & Programming References
1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
CPC Signal Detection—Outgoing [421]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
4
2
1
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
END
SELECT
Note
When this programme is disabled, CPC Signal Detection is only activated during an incoming outside
(CO) line call.
Feature Guide
227
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
Disconnect Time [422]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
4
2
2
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
SELECT
)
STORE
END
Refer to the note.*
To continue
SELECT
Notes
•
•
* The disconnect signal lengths that can be selected depend on your country/area as follows:
For United Kingdom: 0.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s
For South Africa: 0.8 s, 1.5 s, 4.0 s
For Others: 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 4.0 s
The time you select must be longer than the requirements of your telephone company or host PBX.
Feature & Programming References
1.10.6 Flash/Recall
CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
4
2
3
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
SELECT
STORE
END
(Single/Double/
Triple) To continue
SELECT
Note
It is recommended that you set a different ring tone pattern from the ring tone patterns specified in
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] and Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706].
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
228
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Polarity Reverse Detection [424]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
4
2
4
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.5 Reverse Circuit
Collect Call Block [425] (Brazil only)
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
4
2
5
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
END
SELECT
Note
This programme enables the PBX to automatically reject collect calls from the telephone company.
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only)
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
4
2
6
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only)
DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only)
Feature Guide
229
3.3 PT Programming
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429]
(New Zealand only)
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
Go to next or prev. line number
➞
➞
or
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
4
X
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
(27…29)
#
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
27: for day
28: for night
29: for lunch
SELECT
STORE
END
) (Enable/
Disable)
To continue
Go to another jack number
To continue
SELECT
Go to another line number
Note
This is effective only when the DRD feature is enabled in Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New
Zealand only).
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432]
(New Zealand only)
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
Go to next or prev. line number
➞
➞
or
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
4
X
NEXT
(30…32)
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
#
extension jack no.
(01…08/
30: for day
31: for night
32: for lunch
SELECT
STORE
END
) (Enable/
Disable)
To continue
Go to another jack number
SELECT
To continue
Go to another line number
230
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Note
This is effective only when the DRD feature is enabled in Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New
Zealand only).
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] (New Zealand only)
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
4
X
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
(33…34)
SELECT
)
STORE
END
(Single/Double/
Triple) To continue
33: for Pattern 2
34: for Pattern 3
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
4
X
CO line no.
NEXT
(38…40)
(1…3/
name*
common BV OGM no.
name*
(BV01…24/
Not Stored)
)
38: for day
39: for night
40: for lunch
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]
5
0
0
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Without AA/
With AA)
Note
Without AA: Available destinations are extension numbers assigned in Extension Number [009],
Outside (CO) Line Access numbers (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9], 81 through 83), and the Operator
Call number (0 or 9)
With AA: Available destinations are numbers available in "Without AA" mode and numbers (0 through
9) assigned in DISA Built-in AA [501]
Feature Guide
231
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Built-in AA [501]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
extension
jack no.
5
0
1
NEXT
AA no.
(0…9)
SELECT
(Jack/GRP/
3-level AA/
Not Stored)
(01…08)
or
STORE
END
extension
group no.
(1…8)
Note
If you would like to use the Automatic Line Access number (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9]) and/or
Operator Call number in AA mode, do not assign AA number(s) that correspond to Automatic Line
Access or Operator Call numbers (9 and/or 0).
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
FAX Connection [503]
5
0
3
NEXT
extension jack no.
STORE
END
(01…08/Disable)
Notes
•
•
To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step.
The assigned extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set.
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Delayed Answer Time [504]
5
0
4
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(0/3/6/12 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]
5
0
5
NEXT
SELECT
(0/5/10/15 s)
232
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Busy Mode [506]
<To select Disconnect or Call Waiting>
5
0
6
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Disconnect/
Call Waiting)
<To select DISA>
5
0
6
NEXT
SELECT
DISA OGM no.
(DISA)
(1…8)
STORE
END
Feature & Programming References
1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Intercept Mode [507]
5
0
7
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Intercept/
Disconnect)
Feature & Programming References
1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
1.19 Voice Mail Features
DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508]
5
0
8
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Intercept Mode [507]
DISA Ring Time after Intercept [509]
5
0
9
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Feature Guide
233
3.3 PT Programming
DISA Intercept Mode [507]
DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508]
DISA No Dial Mode [510]
5
1
0
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(Intercept/
Disconnect)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Security Mode [511]
5
1
1
NEXT
SELECT
(Trunk/All/
None Security)
Note
Trunk Security: Requires the caller to enter a DISA security code assigned in DISA Security Code [512]
before making an outside (CO) line call.
All Security: Requires the caller to enter a DISA security code before making either an outside (CO)
line or intercom call.
No Security: Allows the caller to make either an outside (CO) line or intercom call without entering a
DISA security code.
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Security Code [512]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
5
1
2
NEXT
code no.
security code
STORE
(1…4)
4…10 digits
(0…9)
To continue
END
SELECT
WARNING
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO)
Line Call feature of DISA.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a) Enabling DISA security (Trunk Security or All Security).
b) Maintaining the secrecy of passwords.
c) Selecting passwords that are complex and random, so that they cannot be easily guessed.
234
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
d) Changing passwords regularly.
Notes
•
•
•
This setting is required if "Trunk Security" or "All Security" is selected in DISA Security Mode [511].
Each DISA security code should be unique.
The number of digits for DISA security codes is selected in DISA Security Code Digits [530].
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Security Mode [511]
Cyclic Tone Detection [513]
5
1
3
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(Disable/
2/3/4 times)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
FAX Tone Detection [514]
5
1
4
NEXT
SELECT
(1/2 time(s))
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
FAX Connection [503]
Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]
5
1
5
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(3/6/9 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA No Dial Mode [510]
Feature Guide
235
3.3 PT Programming
DISA Incoming Assignment [516]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
5
1
6
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA AA Wait Time [517]
5
1
7
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(1…5 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Built-in AA [501]
DISA Tone after Security Code [518]
5
1
8
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Security Code [512]
OGM Mute Time [519]
5
1
9
NEXT
SELECT
(0/2/4/6 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
UCD Group [520]
5
2
0
NEXT
extension group no.
(1…8)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
2.2.2 Group
236
Feature Guide
STORE
END
END
3.3 PT Programming
UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]
5
2
1
waiting time
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(1…32 min/1…59 s) (min/s)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
UCD Busy Mode [523]
UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522]
5
2
2
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(30 s/
1/1.5/2 min)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]
UCD Busy Mode [523]
<To select Intercept-Normal or Disconnect>
5
2
3
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Intercept-Normal/
Disconnect)
<To select Intercept-DISA or Disconnect-OGM>
5
2
3
NEXT
SELECT
(Intercept-DISA/
Disconnect-OGM)
DISA/UCD OGM no.
STORE
END
(1…8)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
UCD Intercept Mode [524]
5
2
4
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Intercept/
Disconnect)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]
5
2
5
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 s)
Feature Guide
237
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
UCD Intercept Mode [524]
UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526]
5
2
6
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 s)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
UCD Intercept Mode [524]
UCD Waiting Message [527]
5
2
7
NEXT
UCD OGM no.
STORE
END
(1…8/
Not Stored)
Feature & Programming References
1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD
DISA Security Code Digits [530]
5
3
0
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(4…10 digits)
Note
When this setting is changed, DISA security codes that have already been assigned in DISA Security
Code [512] will be cleared.
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Ringback Tone [531]
5
3
1
NEXT
SELECT
(Ringback Tone/
Hold Music)
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
238
Feature Guide
STORE
END
3.3 PT Programming
3-level AA Assignment [540-549]
Go to another third AA number
NEXT
or PREV
Go to next or prev.
third AA number
extension
jack no.
5
X
NEXT
second
AA no.
(0…9) (0…9,
(40…49)
[
[40-49: AA no. 0-9]
Notes
•
•
third
SELECT
AA no. name*
(01…08)
or
) (Jack/GRP/
: Skip] 3-level AA/
Not Stored)
To continue
STORE
END
extension
group no.
(1…8)
This programme is available only when "3-level AA" is selected for each AA number in DISA Builtin AA [501].
Only when you select " " as the third AA number, you can select "3-level AA" in the next step.
Feature & Programming References
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]
5
9
9
NEXT
STORE
END
Feature & Programming References
1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD
Extension Group [600]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6
0
0
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
extension group no.
STORE
END
(1…8)
)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
2.2.2 Group
Feature Guide
239
3.3 PT Programming
TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]
NEXT
PREV
or
To continue
6
X
extension jack no.
NEXT
(01…08/
(01…03)
COS no.
STORE
END
(1…5)
)
To continue
01: for day
02: for night
03: for lunch
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Extension Name [604]
NEXT
PREV
or
To continue
6
0
4
NEXT
extension jack no.
extension name*
STORE
(01…08)
Max.
10 characters
To continue
END
SELECT
Note
* An extension name can be stored using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies
depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between
"Alphabet mode" and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT.
Feature & Programming References
1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
3.3.1 Programming Instructions—Entering Characters
Account Code Mode [605]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6
0
5
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
SELECT
STORE
) (Option/Forced/
Verify-All/Verify-Toll)
To continue
SELECT
240
Feature Guide
END
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry
1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code
Account Code [310]
Call Transfer to CO Line [606]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6
0
6
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.11.1 Call Transfer
1.13.1.2 Conference
Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6
0
7
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Executive Busy Override [608]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6
0
8
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.7.2 Executive Busy Override
Feature Guide
241
3.3 PT Programming
DND Override [609]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
6
0
9
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
Parallelled Telephone [610]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
6
1
0
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone
TAM Extension [611]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
6
1
1
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
242
Feature Guide
STORE
To continue
END
3.3 PT Programming
Room Monitor [612]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
6
1
2
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Note
Extensions that are to be monitored must have their jacks set to "Enable" in this programme in advance.
Feature & Programming References
1.10.2 Room Monitor
CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
6
1
3
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation
Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]
Internal Pulse Detection [614]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
6
1
4
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.12.1 Call Hold
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]
Feature Guide
243
3.3 PT Programming
LCD Language [615]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
6
1
5
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
STORE
END
Refer to the note.*
To continue
SELECT
Notes
•
•
•
* The following languages are available for the LCD:
English; Spanish; Portuguese; Russian; Greek; Czech; Hungarian; Slovak; Polish; Italian;
Ukrainian
Selections vary depending on your country/area.
Russian display is only available for the KX-T7730/KX-T7735RU.
When "Russian" or "Ukrainian" is selected in this programme, during intercom calls, the calling
extension's name assigned in Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] is displayed at the called extension.
When another language is selected, the calling extension's name assigned in Extension Name
[604] is displayed.
Extension Name in Cyrillic [616]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
6
1
6
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08)
extension name*
Max.
10 characters
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Notes
•
•
* An extension name can be stored using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies
depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle
between "Alphabet mode", "Cyrillic alphabet mode", and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT.
Russian display is only available for the KX-T7730/KX-T7735RU.
Feature & Programming References
1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
3.3.1 Programming Instructions—Entering Characters
LCD Language [615]
244
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Message Waiting for Another Extension [618]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
6
1
8
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.17.1 Message Waiting
SLT Message Waiting [619]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
6
1
9
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.17.1 Message Waiting
LCS Recording Mode Set [620]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
6
2
0
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
(Stop recording/
Keep recording)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration
Feature Guide
245
3.3 PT Programming
BV Resource [621]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
6
2
1
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
STORE
END
(Resource 1/2)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
BV for Extension [622]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
6
2
2
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
BV Access Code through CO Line [625]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6
2
5
NEXT
extension
jack no.
(01…08)
voice message
access code
4…10 digits
(0…9, #)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Notes
•
•
246
A voice message access code should be different from the corresponding extension number. If the
voice message access code is the same as an extension number, dialling that number will access
the extension, not the voice message area.
A code that starts with a number already assigned as another code cannot be used. For example,
if you assign the codes "1234" and "12345", "12345" cannot be selected since "1234" will be
recognised first.
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
BGM Control for APT [626]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
6
2
6
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)
SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
6
2
7
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
STORE
END
(0…15 s)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.16.1 Caller ID
SLT Caller ID [628]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
6
2
8
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.16.1 Caller ID
Feature Guide
247
3.3 PT Programming
SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
6
2
9
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
STORE
(Disable/
Single/Double)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
1.16.1 Caller ID
Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
Go to next or prev. doorphone number
➞
➞
or
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
7
X
NEXT
(00…02)
doorphone no.
(1…2/
)
#
extension jack no.
(01…08/
00: for day
01: for night
02: for lunch
)
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
Go to another jack number
SELECT
To continue
Go to another doorphone number
Feature & Programming References
1.15.1 Doorphone Call
248
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
Go to next or prev. door opener number
➞
➞
or
To continue
Go to next or prev.
jack number
7
X
NEXT
(1…2/
(03…05)
#
door opener no.
extension jack no. SELECT
(01…08/
)
03: for day
04: for night
05: for lunch
)
STORE
END
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
Go to another jack number
To continue
SELECT
Go to another door opener number
Feature & Programming References
1.15.2 Door Open
Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
7
0
6
NEXT
doorphone no.
(1…2/
SELECT
) (Single/Double/
Triple/S-Double)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Note
It is recommended that you set a different ring tone pattern from the ring tone patterns specified in
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] and CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423].
Feature & Programming References
1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
1.15.1 Doorphone Call
Feature Guide
249
3.3 PT Programming
Doorphone Access Tone [707]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
7
0
7
NEXT
doorphone no.
(1…2/
)
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.10.2 Room Monitor
1.15.1 Doorphone Call
Doorphone Ring Time [708]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
7
0
8
NEXT
doorphone no.
(1…2/
SELECT
)
STORE
END
(15/30 s)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.15.1 Doorphone Call
Door Open Duration [709]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
7
0
9
NEXT
door opener no.
(1…2/
)
SELECT
STORE
(1…8 s)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.15.2 Door Open
250
Feature Guide
END
3.3 PT Programming
Doorphone Ring/Chime [710]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
7
1
0
NEXT
doorphone no.
(1…2/
)
name*
SELECT
(Ring/Chime/
Ring & Chime)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime
Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]
Doorphone Chime Assignment [711]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
7
1
1
NEXT
doorphone no.
(1…2/
)
name*
SELECT
STORE
END
(Relay1…2)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime
Doorphone Ring/Chime [710]
Doorphone Chime Pattern [712]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
7
1
2
NEXT
doorphone no.
(1…2/
)
name*
SELECT
STORE
END
(Pattern1…8)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime
4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
Feature Guide
251
3.3 PT Programming
SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800]
<Select the new line code>
8
0
0
NEXT
SELECT
<Select the baud rate>
STORE
NEXT
(CR+LF/CR)
NEXT
SELECT STORE
<Select the parity bit>
NEXT
(7/8 bits)
Notes
•
•
STORE
(1200/2400/
4800/9600 B)
CR: Carriage Return
LF: Line Feed
<Select the word length>
SELECT
<Select the stop bit length>
SELECT STORE
NEXT
(Mark/Space/
Even/Odd/
None*)
SELECT STORE
END
(1 bit/2 bits)
* Select "None" when the printer does not require error checking.
The following combinations are invalid.
Parity
Word length
Stop bit length
Mark
8
2
Space
8
1
Space
8
2
If any of the above invalid combinations are selected, an alarm tone will be heard.
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
SMDR Parameter [801]
<Select the page length>
8
0
1
NEXT
page length
STORE
(4…99 lines)
<Select the skip perforation>
skip perforation STORE
NEXT
END
(0…95 lines)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802]
<Select an outgoing call>
8
0
2
NEXT
SELECT
(On/Off/Toll)
252
Feature Guide
STORE
<Select an incoming call>
NEXT
SELECT
(On/Off)
STORE
END
3.3 PT Programming
Note
Outgoing Call: On (Print all calls)/Off (No printing)/Toll (Print toll calls only)
Incoming Call: On (Print all calls)/Off (No printing)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]
Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803]
8
0
3
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(No Printing/
Printing)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Speed Dialling Number [001]
System Data Dump [804]
<To select All parameters, System parameter, Speed dial, and/or Stop output>
8
0
4
NEXT
SELECT
(All para/
System para/
Speed dial/
Stop output)
STORE
END
To continue
<To select the CO (outside line) parameter>
8
0
4
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
CO line no.
(1…3/
(CO para)
STORE
)
END
To continue
<To select the Extension parameter>
8
0
4
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
extension jack no.
(01…08/
(Extn. para)
)
STORE
END
To continue
<To select the DSS parameter>
8
0
4
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(DSS para)
DSS console no.
(1…2/
)
STORE
END
To continue
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Feature Guide
253
3.3 PT Programming
SMDR Account Code [805]
8
0
5
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(CODE/INDEX)
Feature & Programming References
1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Account Code [310]
Account Code Mode [605]
SMDR Language [806]
8
0
6
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
Refer to the note.*
Note
* The following languages are available for SMDR:
English; Spanish; Portuguese; Greek; Czech; Hungarian; Slovak; Polish; Italian
Selections vary depending on your country/area.
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
BV Total Recording Time [807]
8
0
7
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(20/30/60 min)
Note
The recording quality depends on the setting time.
20 (min): High; 30: Normal; 60: Low
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
BV Card Initialisation [808]
8
0
8
NEXT
STORE
Feature & Programming References
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
254
Feature Guide
END
END
3.3 PT Programming
Caller ID [900]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
9
0
0
NEXT
CO line no.
name*
SELECT
STORE
(1…3/
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
)
END
SELECT
Note
The DISA Delayed Answer Time for the outside (CO) lines enabled here will always be 6 seconds even
if "0 s" or "3 s" is selected in DISA Delayed Answer Time [504].
Feature & Programming References
1.16.1 Caller ID
Caller ID Area Code [901]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
9
0
1
NEXT
code no.
area code
STORE
(1…5)
Max. 6 digits
(0…9)
To continue
END
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.16.1 Caller ID
1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902]
Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902]
SELECT
To continue
<Select the removed digits>
9
0
2
NEXT
code no.
removed digits
(1…5)
(0…9)
STORE
END
<Select the added number>
➞
added number
STORE
END
Max. 4 digits
(0…9, , #)
Feature & Programming References
1.16.1 Caller ID
1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
Feature Guide
255
3.3 PT Programming
Caller ID Area Code [901]
Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903]
<Select the removed digits>
9
0
3
NEXT
removed digits
STORE
END
(0…9)
<Select the added number>
➞
added number
STORE
END
Max. 4 digits
(0…9, , #)
Feature & Programming References
1.16.1 Caller ID
1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
Caller ID Log Priority [904]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
9
0
4
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
STORE
(Name/
Number)
END
To continue
SELECT
Note
This programme is available when the Caller ID service provides both a name and a number. If only the
number is provided, this programme is not necessary.
Feature & Programming References
1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
1.18.4 Display Information
Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905]
9
0
5
NEXT
SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.16.1 Caller ID
256
Feature Guide
STORE
END
3.3 PT Programming
Caller ID SMDR Format [906]
9
0
6
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Without CID: Not printed/
With CID: Printed)
Note
Even if a name is also sent by the Caller ID service, only the number is printed.
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Caller ID SMDR Printout [907]
9
0
7
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Common Area Call Log Check [909]
or PREV
NEXT
To continue
9
0
9
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
END
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
Caller ID Type [910]
or
NEXT
PREV
To continue
9
1
0
NEXT
CO line no.
(1…3/
)
SELECT
STORE
END
(FSK/DTMF)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References
1.16.1 Caller ID
Feature Guide
257
3.3 PT Programming
Call Log Next Page [927]
9
2
7
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Note
This programme enables the PBX to include page breaks when printing out call logs for each extension.
SMDR Mode for Printing [929]
9
2
9
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(MODE 1/MODE 2)
Note
Even if "On" (outgoing/incoming call) or "Toll" (outgoing call) is selected in Incoming/Outgoing Call
Selection for Printing [802], when "MODE 2" is selected in this programme, the call log information is
not displayed by SMDR, but the information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout.
Feature & Programming References
1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.20.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension
Call Forwarding Selection [963]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
9
6
3
NEXT
extension jack no.
(01…08/
)
SELECT
STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
END
SELECT
Note
This programme also functions for outside (CO) line calls via the DISA Intercept Routing feature, and
when DISA calls are received by a DISA ring group.
Feature & Programming References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
TRS Check after Answering [966]
9
6
6
NEXT
SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
258
Feature Guide
STORE
END
3.3 PT Programming
Note
This programme specifies whether the PBX checks DTMF signals when answering calls or not.
TRS Check Time after Answering [967]
9
6
7
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(5/10/15/
20/30/60 s)
Note
This programme specifies the length of time that the DTMF signal is checked when "Enable" is selected
in TRS Check after Answering [966].
KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968]
9
6
8
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References
1.17.1 Message Waiting
Country [995]
9
9
5
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(NE: NE (ES)/NE (IT))
(CE: CE/CE (CZ))
Notes
•
•
This programme specifies your country/area when the suffix of the PBX is "NE" or "CE". For more
information, please consult your dealer.
When the country code is changed, all system data is initialised.
Feature & Programming References
2.3.6 Country Setting
Firmware Version [998]
9
9
8
NEXT
SELECT
SELECT
END
Display Example
< ROM >
< Firmware >
Y501A 040430 (BX)
1.0.0
Version
Version
Date
Note
You can confirm the ROM and the firmware version of the PBX alternately by pressing SELECT.
Feature & Programming References
2.3.7 Firmware Upgrade
Feature Guide
259
3.3 PT Programming
System Data Clear [999]
<To select All parameters, System parameter, and/or Speed dial>
9
9
9
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(All para/
System para/
Speed dial)
END
To continue
<To select the CO (outside line) parameter>
9
9
9
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
CO line no.
(1…3/
(CO para)
STORE
)
END
To continue
<To select the Extension parameter>
9
9
9
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
extension jack no.
(01…08/
(Extn. para)
)
STORE
END
To continue
<To select the DSS parameter>
9
9
9
NEXT
SELECT
(DSS para)
Feature & Programming References
2.3.2 PT Programming
260
Feature Guide
STORE
DSS console no.
(1…2/
)
STORE
To continue
END
Section
4
Appendix
Feature Guide
261
4.1 Capacity of System Resources
4.1
Capacity of System Resources
4.1.1
Capacity of System Resources
Category
System
Item
Outside (CO) Line Group
3
Extension Group
8
Absent Message
6 × 16 characters
Message Waiting
8/extn.
Number of Characters of Name
Extension Number Digits
Conference (5-party)
1
Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)
Intercom Call
Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/
UCD
Toll Restriction (TRS)
262
Feature Guide
2 or 3
10
Host PBX Access Code
Automatic Route Selection
(ARS)
10
Call Park Zone
Account Code
Dialling
KX-TEA308
4 digits, 50 entries
1 or 2 digits, 8 entries
64 calls
3
32 resources/PBX (8
resources for Direct Inward
System Access [DISA]/
Uniform Call Distribution
[UCD], 24 resources for 3-level
Automated Attendant [AA])
Emergency Call
24 digits, 5 entries
Quick Dialling
10 digits, 10 entries
System Speed Dialling
32 digits, 100 entries
Personal Speed Dialling
24 digits, 10 entries/extn.
One-touch Dialling
24 digits
Hot Line
32 digits
Redial
64 digits
Leading Number Table
7 digits, 80 entries
Leading Number Exception Table
7 digits, 80 entries
ARS Carrier
4
Class of Service (COS)
5
Denied Code Table
11 digits, 80 entries
Exception Code Table
11 digits, 80 entries
4.1 Capacity of System Resources
Category
Call Log
Item
Incoming Call Log
KX-TEA308
20 entries/extn.,
300 entries/PBX
125 voice messages/Built-in
Voice Message (BV) resource
Password
System Password
Extension Password
Voice Message Access Code
4–7 digits
4 digits
4–10 digits
Feature Guide
263
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
4.2
Tones/Ring Tones
4.2.1
Tones/Ring Tones
Tone Patterns
Dial Tone 1
1s
Normal
Dial Tone 2
1s
Any of the following features is
set:
•
Absent Message
•
Background Music
[Czech Republic only]
(BGM) (proprietary
telephone [PT] only)
1s
•
Call Forwarding
(FWD)
•
Call Pickup Deny
•
Data Line Security
•
Do Not Disturb
(DND)
•
Extension Lock
•
Hot Line (single line
telephone [SLT] only)
•
Message Waiting
(PT only)
•
Remote Extension
Lock
•
Timed Reminder
Dial Tone 3
•
•
•
Dial Tone 4
A new voice message has
been recorded (Built-in Voice
Message [BV]).
264
1s
When going off-hook
with an SLT that has
messages waiting
When Account Code
Entry is performed
When answering a
call from Timed
Reminder
Feature Guide
1s
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Dial Tone 5
1s
The remaining voice message
recording time is less than 5
minutes or 125 voice
messages have been
recorded (Built-in Voice
Message [BV]).
Busy Tones
1s
[New Zealand only]
1s
[Czech Republic only]
1s
Reorder Tones
1s
The outside (CO) line you tried
to seize is not assigned or was
denied.
[Czech Republic only]
1s
[Malaysia only]
1s
Ringback Tones
1s
Single (3-s interval)
Double (3-s interval)
1s
Feature Guide
265
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Single (5-s interval)
1s
Double (5-s interval)
1s
DND Tone
1s
The dialled extension is
refusing incoming calls.
Call Waiting Tone 1
Call Waiting Tone 2
15 s
1s
Single
Double
1s
Triple
1s
Hold Alarm Tone
15 s
A call has been on hold for
longer than the specified time.
Warning Tone (Outside
(CO) Line Call Limitation)
1s
This tone is sent 15 seconds
before the specified time for
disconnection.
Confirmation Tone 1
The feature was set
successfully, or the Extension
Lock feature was set or
cancelled.
266
Feature Guide
1s
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Confirmation Tone 2
The new feature setting was
the same as the previous
setting, or certain features
were successfully performed
or accessed (e.g., Call Hold,
Automatic Callback Busy).
Confirmation Tone 3
1s
1s
Before the following features
activate:
•
Retrieving a held call
•
Picking up another
call
•
Establishing a
conference call
•
Paging/Answering a
paging
announcement
Feature Guide
267
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Ring Tone Patterns
Ring Tone Patterns
The following ring tone patterns can be assigned to incoming call types (outside (CO) line, intercom, or
doorphone calls), or are fixed for certain call types (Hold Recall, Timed Reminder, or Camp-on Recall).
Single
(Incoming calls/Hold Recall
[outside (CO) line calls])
1s
Double
(Incoming calls/Hold Recall
[intercom calls])
1s
Triple
(Incoming calls/Timed
Reminder)
1s
S-Double
(Incoming calls [doorphone
calls only]/Camp-on Recall)
1s
Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company (New Zealand only)
The following ring tone patterns sent from the telephone company can be detected for each outside (CO)
line.
268
Pattern 1
1s
Pattern 2
1s
Pattern 3
1s
Pattern 4
1s
Feature Guide
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Doorphone Chime Patterns
The following doorphone chime patterns can be assigned to each doorphone when doorbells and door
chimes are connected to the PBX.
Pattern 1*
1s
Pattern 2*
1s
Pattern 3*
1s
Pattern 4*
1s
Pattern 5
1s
Pattern 6
1s
Pattern 7
1s
Pattern 8
1s
* Chime patterns 1 to 4 are played only one time during the doorphone ringing time.
Feature Guide
269
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
270
Feature Guide
Index
Feature Guide
271
Index
Numerics
1st Carrier Selection Code [359]
218
2-way Recording into the VPS
145
3-level AA Assignment [540-549]
239
3-level Automated Attendant (AA)
105
3-party Conference
97
5-party Conference
97
A
Absent Message
129
Account Code [310]
217
Account Code Entry
43
Account Code Mode [605]
240
Administrative Information Output Features
150
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
39
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
39
Answering Features
35
Answering Features—OVERVIEW
35
Appendix
261
ARS CO Line Group [364]
220
ARS Dial Tone [362]
219
ARS Inter-digit Time [363]
219
ARS Modification—Added Number [361]
219
ARS Modification—Removed Digits [360]
219
ARS Selection [350]
218
ARS —> Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
72
Audible Tone Features
158
Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390]
221
Authorisation Code
75
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
61
Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type
184
Automatic Designated Line Access [419]
227
Automatic Line Access (Local Access)
51
Automatic Line Access [121]
208
Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311]
217
Automatic Redial
57
Automatic Redial Interval [114]
206
Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113]
206
Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122]
208
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
72
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
72
Automatic Time Adjustment
177
Automatic Time Adjustment [152]
212
B
Background Music (BGM)
104
Bell Frequency [120]
208
Bell-off Detection [213]
215
BGM Control for APT [626]
247
BGM —> Background Music (BGM)
104
Break Ratio [123]
208
Built-in Voice Message (BV)
114
Busy Line/Busy Party Features
61
Busy Tones
265
Buttons and Functions
192
BV Access Code through CO Line [625]
246
BV Card Initialisation [808]
254
BV for Extension [622]
246
BV Recording Time [214]
215
272
Feature Guide
BV Resource [621]
246
BV Total Recording Time [807]
254
BV —> Built-in Voice Message (BV)
114
C
Call Duration Counter Start [204]
213
Call Forwarding (FWD)
31
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
30
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
30
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—OVERVIEW
30
Call Forwarding Selection [963]
258
Call Forwarding Start Time [202]
212
Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]
241
Call Handling Features
13
Call Hold
90
Call Log Next Page [927]
258
Call Log Printout for Each Extension
155
Call Park
92
Call Park Recall
92
Call Pickup
37
Call Pickup Deny
37
Call Pickup Tone [117]
207
Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM)
37
Call Splitting
93
Call Transfer
88
Call Transfer to CO Line [606]
241
Call Transfer with Announcement
88
Call Transfer without Announcement
88
Call Transfer—Screened —> Call Transfer with Announcement
88
Call Transfer—Unscreened —> Call Transfer without Announcement
88
Call Waiting
22
Call Waiting Tone
63
Caller ID
120
Caller ID [900]
255
Caller ID Area Code [901]
255
Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905]
256
Caller ID Display on SLT
120
Caller ID Features
120
Caller ID Log Priority [904]
256
Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902]
255
Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903]
256
Caller ID SMDR Format [906]
257
Caller ID SMDR Printout [907]
257
Caller ID Type [910]
257
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
87
Capacity of System Resources
262
Carrier Exception Code [300]
215
Circular Hunting
23
Class of Service (COS)
163
Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]
239
CO Indicator [109]
205
CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613]
243
CO Line Connection [400]
221
CO Line Group Number [404]
223
CO Line Mode—Day/Night/Lunch [414-416]
225
CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]
228
Collect Call Block [425] (Brazil only)
229
Common Area Call Log Check [909]
257
Common BV OGM
114
Index
Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215]
215
Conference
97
Conference Features
96
Conference Features—OVERVIEW
96
Conference Pattern [116]
207
Conference Tone [105]
204
Confirmation Tone
159
Console Paired Telephone [004]
199
Consultation Hold
95
Conversation Features
78
COS —> Class of Service (COS)
163
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]
213
Country [995]
259
Country Setting
185
CPC Signal Detection—Incoming [420]
227
CPC Signal Detection—Outgoing [421]
227
CPC —> Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
87
Cyclic Tone Detection [513]
235
D
Data Line Security
82
Date & Time [000]
197
Delayed Ringing
28
Delayed Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [411-413]
224
Denied Code Tables
64
Dial Mode [401]
222
Dial Tone
158
Dial Type Selection
44
Dialling Start Time [206]
213
DIL —> Direct In Line (DIL)
14
Direct In Line (DIL)
14
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
106
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
28
Direct Message feature
117
Direct One-touch Answering
35
Direct Outside (CO) Line Access
51
Directed Call Pickup
37
DISA AA Service
106
DISA AA Wait Time [517]
236
DISA Built-in AA [501]
232
DISA Busy Mode [506]
233
DISA Delayed Answer Time [504]
232
DISA Incoming Assignment [516]
236
DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]
231
DISA Intercept Mode [507]
233
DISA IRNA to BV—Day/Night/Lunch [438-440]
231
DISA No Dial Mode [510]
234
DISA Ring Time after Intercept [509]
233
DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508]
233
DISA Ringback Tone [531]
238
DISA Security Code [512]
234
DISA Security Code Digits [530]
238
DISA Security Mode [511]
234
DISA Tone after Security Code [518]
236
DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]
232
DISA —> Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
28, 106
Disconnect Time [422]
228
Display Information
140
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only)
229
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
20
DND Override
34
DND Override [609]
242
DND Tone
266
DND —> Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
30
Do Not Disturb (DND)
34
Door Open
101
Door Open Duration [709]
250
Door Opener—Day/Night/Lunch [703-705]
249
Doorbell/Door Chime
102
Doorphone Access Tone [707]
250
Doorphone Call
100
Doorphone Chime Assignment [711]
251
Doorphone Chime Pattern [712]
251
Doorphone Chime Patterns
269
Doorphone Ring Time [708]
250
Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]
249
Doorphone Ring/Chime [710]
251
Doorphone Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [700-702]
248
DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] (New Zealand only)
231
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [427-429]
(New Zealand only)
230
DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch [430-432]
230
(New Zealand only)
DRD —> Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
20
DSS Console Jack Assignment [003]
199
DSS Lamp Mode [112]
206
DSS Off-hook Mode [126]
209
DTMF Integration [103]
204
DTMF Integration Port [102]
204
DTMF Receiver Check [107]
205
DTMF Time [210]
214
E
EFA —> External Feature Access (EFA)
84
Electronic Station Lockout —> Extension Lock
70
Emergency Call
42
Emergency Number [309]
216
Entering Characters
194
Entering Manager Programming Mode
193
Entering System Programming Mode
193
Exception Code Tables
64
Exclusive Call Hold
90
Executive Busy Override
62
Executive Busy Override [608]
241
Executive Busy Override Deny
62
Extension Controlling Features
156
Extension Feature Clear
156
Extension Group [600]
239
Extension Jack Configuration
162
Extension Lock
70
Extension Lock—CANCEL ALL
70
Extension Name [604]
240
Extension Name in Cyrillic [616]
244
Extension Number [009]
201
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]
207
Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]
214
Extension-to-Outside (CO) Line Call Duration
85
External Feature Access (EFA)
84
Feature Guide
273
Index
External Pager Access Tone [106]
205
F
Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
187
FAX Connection [503]
232
FAX Tone Detection [514]
235
Feature Guide References
2
Feature Highlights
5
Feature Numbering
178
Firmware Upgrade
186
Firmware Version [998]
259
Fixed Buttons
134
Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support
130
Flash/Recall
83
Flash/Recall Key Mode [110]
205
Flash/Recall Mode for a Locked Extension [108]
205
Flash/Recall Time [418]
226
Flexible Buttons
136
Flexible Outward Dialling—Day/Night/Lunch [405-407]
223
Flexible Ringing—Day/Night/Lunch [408-410]
224
FWD to Outside (CO) Line
31
FWD —> Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
30
FWD—All Calls
31
FWD—Busy/No Answer
31
FWD—Follow Me
31
G
General Call Hold
Group
164
Group Call Pickup
90
37
H
Handset/Headset Selection —> Headset Operation
81
Hands-free Answerback
38
Hands-free Operation
78
Headset Operation
81
Hold Recall
90
Hold Recall Time [200]
212
Holding Features
90
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]
214
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a
47
Host PBX)
Host PBX Access Code [403]
222
Hot Line
60
Hot Line Waiting Time [203]
213
Hunting Group Set [100]
203
Hunting Type [101]
203
K
KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968]
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
56
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013]
203
259
L
Last Number Redial
57
LCD Language [615]
244
LCD Time Display [010]
201
LCS Recording Mode Set [620]
245
LED Indication
138
Line Preference Override
50
Line Preference—Incoming
36
Line Preference—Outgoing
50
Live Call Screening (LCS)
145
Lockout
85
Log-in/Log-out
29
M
Making Call Features
39
Memory Dialling Features
53
Memory Dialling Features—OVERVIEW
53
Message Features
127
Message Waiting
127
Message Waiting for Another Extension [618]
245
Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock
127
Microphone Mute
80
Music on Hold
94
Music on Hold [111]
206
N
I
Idle Extension Hunting
23
Idle Line Preference
50
Incoming Call Features
14
Incoming Call Indication Features
17
Incoming Call Indication Features—OVERVIEW
17
Incoming Call Log
124
Incoming Call Log Display Lock
125
Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Features
14
Incoming Reverse [153]
212
274
Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802]
252
Installation Manual References
2
Installing and Starting KX-TEA308 Maintenance Console
191
Intercept Routing
15
Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA)
15
Intercept Routing—No Dial
15
Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]
235
Intercom Call
39
Intercom Call Features
39
Inter-digit Time [208]
214
Internal Call Features
16
Internal Pulse Detection [614]
243
Introduction
190
IRNA —> Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA)
15
Itemised Billing Code
75
Itemised Billing Code [389]
221
Feature Guide
No Dial Disconnection [211]
214
No Line Preference
36, 50
O
OGM Mute Time [519]
236
One-touch Dialling
55
One-touch Transfer
88
One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005]
Operator Assignment [008]
200
Operator Call
170
199
Index
Operator/Manager Features
169
Optional Device Features
100
Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD
105
Outside (CO) Line Access
51
Outside (CO) Line Call Features
41
Outside (CO) Line Call Features—OVERVIEW
41
Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation
85
Outside (CO) Line Group Access
51
Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection
18
Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Call Duration
85
Ring Tone Patterns
268
Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company (New Zealand
268
only)
Ringback Tone Pattern [128]
209
Ringback Tones
265
Ringing Line Preference
36
Room Monitor
79
Room Monitor [612]
243
Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384]
220
Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358]
218
Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]
220
Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354]
218
P
Paging
99
Paging Deny
99
Paging Features
99
Paging—All Extensions
99
Paging—All Extensions & External
99
Paging—External
99
Paging—Group
99
Parallelled Telephone
86
Parallelled Telephone [610]
242
Password Security
190
Pause Insertion
46
Pause Time [417]
226
PC Programming
172, 191
Personal BV OGM
114
Pickup Dialling —> Hot Line
60
Pickup Group [127]
209
Polarity Reverse Detection [424]
229
Polarity Reverse Detection —> Reverse Circuit
45
Power Failure Connections
187
Power Failure Restart
188
Power Failure Transfer
187
Prime Line Preference
36, 50
Programming Instructions
189, 192
Programming Procedures
197
Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
134
PT Programming
175, 192
PT Programming References
2
PT —> Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
134
Pulse Restriction [118]
207
Pulse Speed [402]
222
Pulse to Tone Conversion
44
S
Q
Quick Dialling
59
R
Receiving Calls
35
Receiving Group Features
23
Redial
57
Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119]
208
Remote Extension Lock
70
Remote Station Lock Control —> Remote Extension Lock
Remote Timed Reminder
157
Reorder Tones
265
Required Telephone
192
Reverse Circuit
45
Ring Tone Pattern Selection
19
70
Saved Number Redial
57
S-CO Line Access
51
Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]
202
Secret Dialling
54
Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803]
253
Seizing a Line Features
49
Seizing a Line Features—OVERVIEW
49
SLT Caller ID [628]
247
SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151]
212
SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150]
211
SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629]
248
SLT Hold Mode [104]
204
SLT Message Waiting [619]
245
SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]
210
SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]
247
SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142]
210
SMDR Account Code [805]
254
SMDR Language [806]
254
SMDR Mode for Printing [929]
258
SMDR Parameter [801]
252
SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800]
252
SMDR —> Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
150
SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145]
211
SMS Routing Table—CO [146]
211
SMS Routing Table—Extension [147]
211
SMS —> Short Message Service (SMS)
130
Speed Dialling—Personal/System
58
Station Feature Clear —> Extension Feature Clear
156
Station Hunting —> Idle Extension Hunting
23
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
150
Station Programme Clear —> Extension Feature Clear
156
Station Speed Dialling —> Personal Speed Dialling
58
System Configuration and Administration Features
161
System Configuration—Hardware
162
System Configuration—Software
163
System Data Clear [999]
260
System Data Control
172
System Data Dump [804]
253
System Password [002]
198
System Requirements
191
System Speed Dialling Name [011]
202
System Speed Dialling Number [001]
197
T
TAM Extension [611]
242
Feature Guide
275
Index
TAM —> Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM)
Terminated Hunting
23
Time Service
166
Time Service Start Time [007]
200
Time Service Switching Mode [006]
200
Timed Reminder
157
Toll Restriction (TRS)
64
Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
64
Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code
68
Tones/Ring Tones
264
Transfer Recall
88
Transfer Recall Time [201]
212
Transferring Features
88
TRS Check after Answering [966]
258
TRS Check for * and # [125]
209
TRS Check Time after Answering [967]
259
TRS for System Speed Dialling
65
TRS —> Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
64
TRS-COS—Day/Night/Lunch [601-603]
240
TRS—COS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]
216
TRS—Exception Code [306]
216
TRS—Extension Lock Class
67, 70
TRS—Extension Lock Class [312]
217
TRS—System Speed Dialling Class [301]
216
U
UCD Busy Mode [523]
237
UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]
237
UCD Group [520]
236
UCD Intercept Mode [524]
237
UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522]
237
UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526]
238
UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]
237
UCD Waiting Message [527]
238
Unattended Conference
97
Unattended Conference Recall
97
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
25
User Manual References
2
V
VM 1 APT Port [130]
210
VM —> Voice Mail Features
142
Voice Mail APT Integration
142
Voice Mail Features
142
Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration
147
W
Walking COS
71
Warning Tone (Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation)
276
Feature Guide
266
37
Index
Feature Guide
277
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal
use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic
Communications Co., Ltd.
© 2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
PSQX3533YA KK0505MN1065
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement